Past Dreams of ADoD

Hadashi de Bara wo Fume [Chapter 55]

2012-03-03T11:50:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 28, 2012

Cover page: “Getting married with Nozomu--!? Sumi’s fate is!?” Everyone is shock after smiling Nozomu told them that he is going to marry Sumi. Sumi tries to protest by saying that didn’t he say that unless he hasn’t divorced with Miu.. Nozomu tells her that the issue between him and Miu has already been resolved. While Sumi is surprised by that, Nozomu tells his father that his health hasn’t recovered so he should rest. As his wife puts him to bed, Nozomu’s father worriedly watches on as Nozomu leads Sumi out and tells her that they should go home. Sumi can only mentally think of Soichiroh. Meanwhile, Soichiroh’s boss is telling him to go to England with him. He also says that it is necessary for Soichiroh to go with him as his attendant for he plans to expand his business. And, of course, the salary will be fair for him. Looking thoughtful, Soichiroh tells him to let him think about it a bit. Later on, Soichiroh goes to the old shack where the kids welcome him and ask if he brought something back. To the kids’ delight, he brought home some eel and stuffed buns. They ask him when Sumi is coming back for they want to live together with her soon. Soichiroh looks surprised. Then, he sadly says that one day, she will.. At Ijuin residence, Nozomu’s father has been looking at old photo albums. He somewhat looks fondly at young Nozomu, his wife and daughter. Then, his wife enters to say that it is strange that he isn’t at the hospital. She is surprised that he is looking at the old pictures. She tries to grab the photos and angrily tells him that she told him before to throw those old photos away. Nozomu’s father shouts back for her to shut up and this has nothing to do with her. His wife is taken aback as Nozomu’s father goes out of the room with the album.

At the pier, Eisuke is still working as a stevedore when his boss calls out to him that he has a guest, calling for him. Just when Eisuke is trying to make an excuse about paying his debt, he is surprised when Nozomu’s father asks if he is Eisuke, and there is something he wants to ask him. Nozomu’s father is holding a photo album. In Ashida residence, Sumi is banging on the door and shouting that she has been locked up for three days already. She shouts that it is okay if they go out on a stroll or visit the hospital, just let her out. To her surprise, the door opens. The butlers and maids bring in some wedding dresses and tell her to try out the gowns that she will wear for the wedding. Sumi did as told. The maids exclaim that she is beautiful, no matter what kind of clothes she wear. Sumi thinks that if she got married to Nozomu, she really won’t be able to escape from Nozomu, and she won’t be able to see Soichiroh again. While putting a cross pendant necklace on Sumi, Keiko says that dress is a match with the necklace. Keiko says that Sumi brought it with her, a pure platinum cross. It has been refitted on to a new necklace chain. Sumi says that it isn’t hers, and it probably belongs to her brother. Keiko says is that so. She tells Sumi that Nozomu asked her to go down for a while. Sumi did as told. At the living room[?], Sumi is shock to see so many baskets/bouquets of roses are placed all over the place. Sumi looks shock and aghast. Nozomu comes in and tells her that everyone heard of their marriage and has sent those flowers to congratulate them. He hasn’t finished taking when Sumi suddenly exclaims, “No!!” Nozomu is shock when Sumi quickly turns around and runs off. Nozomu chases after her.
Outside the house, Sumi is teary-eyed and coughing. Nozomu bends down to her and asks her what the matter is. Sumi says that she can’t stand those roses. While puzzled Nozomu tries to help her, he notices that his father arriving. Carrying the photo album, Nozomu’s flustered father suddenly calls out, “Aiko..” Nozomu asks what he is talking about. Upon arriving, Eisuke shouts that they can’t marry. Just when Nozomu is asking what nonsense they are talking about, Nozomu’s father tells him that this girl is Aiko. While Sumi and Nozomu look surprised, Nozomu’s father says that she is Nozomu’s long-time missing, blood-related younger sister, Aiko. Scans by 深雪汉化.

Tonari no Kaibutsu-kun [Chapter 35]

2012-02-27T18:45:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 23, 2012

It’s back to school. Friends are busy chatting with their friends. At the shoe lockers, Asako is changing her shoes. Then, she looks dark and tense. She drops her shoes in surprise when she overhears someone greeting Sasayan good morning. Blurb: “Second school term starts. The night during the summer festival, the two of them held hands as they went back-!?” Some guys are greeting Sasayan and the baseball team. Then, Sasayan notices Asako by the shoe lockers. He happily greets her a good morning and it has been a long time since the summer festival.. He didn’t finish what he is saying since Asako quickly turns to leave. Glasses friend asks Sasayan if something happened between them. With a deadpan expression, Sasayan says that he can say that. Blurb: “Second school term. What if there is a new romance that is going to sprout? What. Eh!!!??” Title: Sasayan-kun and Natsume-san [Thanks to mia_chwan, Mamuraa and shakanen for the help with the Japanese title ^^] After walking, Shizuku wonders what’s up with her that she forgot her self-study notebook. When it is about 9:28am, she goes out of her classroom to see Haru standing at the hallway. Haru happily waves at her and whispers that it is such a coincidence to meet each other while classes are still ongoing. She goes to him and asks him what he is doing. Haru whispers for her not to talk out loud because right now, he is being punished for reading a book in class. Shizuku asks what kind of book it is. Haru says that it is a long story, and because of changing seat assignments, he now sits near where Shitayanagi and others are. Flashback: Shitayanagi and others showed Haru a porn magazine and asked him which girl he likes. While building a tower with playing cards, Haru said the one in the left, the second girl. Terashima commented that Haru’s taste is good, and he also likes that one. Shitayanagi said that he likes this other one for if *beep* is a person, she would be like that. Haru said that she isn’t bad but he thinks that Shintayanagi’s way of thinking is kind of different. He also said that it seemed that Shitayanagi and others would look at this kind of extreme things, and it is such a difficult school life. Shitayanagi said that one of the baseball club members brought it, and does Haru want to see it. Surprised Haru asked if he can. While holding the porn magazine, Haru and Shitayanagi are happily laughing. Then, the displeased female teacher called out their names and asked what they are reading during class, and who brought it. To Haru’s shock, Shitayanagi said that it is Haru. End flashback.

Haru says how he can explain it, it felt as if there is a misunderstanding wherein he gave an impression that he has this interesting hobby, and it appears that in that kind of situation, the one responsible is the last one [who is holding it]. This is something he learned from Shitayanagi and others. Shizuku says okay, and what kind of book is it. Haru comments that since the start, she would bite into that topic and won’t let go of it. He tells her that it is a practical art/drawing, and don’t ask further about it. While Haru wonders if it will be confiscated, Shizuku quickly looks left and right. Then, Haru is surprised when she suddenly stands beside him. Blushing, Haru asks her what it is. Shizuku tells him not to be conscious for anyway, no one is around. Haru says is that so, but he felt like a deer that got caught in the headlights [/to be so frightened or surprised that you cannot move or think + heart beating fast]. Blushing, Shizuku says that it does make one feel a bit nervous and guilty since classes are still ongoing. Haru asks her if there is anything that has changed at Shizuku and the others’ class. Shizuku says that nothing special but Asako has been acting weird. Haru says that she always is, so what happened. Shizuku says, how she can say it, Asako suddenly said that there is a possibility that Sasayan likes her. Blurb: “Wishing everyone a happy new year. Hope that this year will also be a pleasant one.” During basketball PE class, Asako is looking away while telling Sasayan, “Let me clearly tell you first that it is a ‘no’. Deadpan Sasayan tells her that it isn’t only at the start of school, she has been snubbing him. “You have been ignoring my calls and messages during summer break. And, right now, what is this, all of a sudden? Calling me out here.” Asako says that it is about that night at the En-nichi[/temple fair]. Sasayan thinks that it turns out to be that, like what he thought. Asako tells him that she lost her head during that time, and no matter what is said, she did hold hands with him. “But, let me say it clearly first, I only think of you as a good friend so if you were to something like fall in love for me now, I will be quite troubled.” Sasayan looks surprised. Then, he looks dark and asks, “Ha? Are you saying that just by holding hands, I would come to like you, Asako?” Asako says that her carelessness is the cause of everything, and she had deeply reflected on it so he shouldn’t do that ‘lose your way’ thing again and it is okay to keep things the same as before. To Asako’s surprise, irked Sasayan asks if she is an IDIOT. Aghast Asako exclaims what he just said. Sasayan says that if it is like what Asako said, he has been directly [judged as] eliminated and could it be that he couldn’t even complain about it. Asako exclaims that he is still willful[/stubborn]. To her aghast and irritation, Sasayan tells her that it is because of this reason, her friends aren’t increasing. Asako says that before, she always felt that it seems that Sasayan is acting high and mighty while looking down on her and Haru <- same type. “Is that so? Because you are popular and despises other people’s behavior[/actions]. I really hope that you don’t do that again.” Preparing to leave while holding the basketball with his finger, Sasayan says who that is. “Ah, and also, ever since before, I still think that, aren’t you too self-conscious[/full of yourself]?” Asako is totally shock by that.
During lunch break, while banging her head in the bushes, Asako is shouting that she is so frustrated and what’s up with that kind of conversation when she fundamentally wanted to talk properly with him from today on. While eating and studying at the same time, Shizuku asks what, so in the end, it is Asako’s fault. Blurb: “Natsume: Because she is so angry, she forgot to change clothes.” Asako stops to think that she also wasn’t able to tell Sasayan, ‘thank you for worrying about me’. Shizuku asks her how about she apologizes since Sasayan is very nice and kind towards everyone. Angrily pointing at Shizuku, Asako tearfully says that is it, that Sasayan who’s strong point is being nice to everyone except her whom he is subtly strict with, no matter what. “Unexpectedly treating me, like a fool, the me who has few friends!!” Shizuku says that is what she is saying, Asako did something to provoke Sasayan into anger. Holding a tea pot, Iyo asks if Asako is really troubled about having few friends. While Iyo offers some Swedish sweets to her, Shizuku asks she [Iyo] would usually show up at this place. Iyo says that it is totally unnecessary for people of the same sex to like oneself and they couldn’t marry them anyway. Asako sweatdrops and thinks that Iyo is amazing. Iyo says that even if it isn’t a necessity to make them like oneself, but she [Iyo] likes and respects Asako. Asako is really happy to hear that. Then, Iyo happily serves some red tea to Haru. Haru apologizes for the trouble and accepts it. It’s September. While Haru goes to drink the hot tea, Iyo thinks that in the end, Haru-senpai is really amazing since he is more sparkling [now], upon seeing him again after summer break. Blushing, Iyo thinks that during the camping trip, she had met a perfect-type of guy [Yuzu] and he had made her heart beat but in the end, her brother won’t tell her who that guy is. “Compared to some unknown faraway guy whose name I don’t know, nearby Haru-senpai is..” Iyo asks Shizuku to please break up with Haru. Drinking her tea, Shizuku refuses. Happily standing up, Asako exclaims to look, regardless of what Sasayan said, right now, she already has super amazing companions who understand her. “Regarding friends, it is better to have quality than quantity!! *turns around* Isn’t that right, Haru.” Then, someone calls out to Haru. It is A group baseball team eating lunch on the roof. [Left to right = Yano. That is guesswork name from 野納. It is either that or Nonou, which is more of a surname. I think he is Shitayanagi. Then, Sako, and Terashima.] Terashima exclaims that they and Sasayan are going to practice hitting baseball range today. Yano asks how about they all go together. Haru tells them not to make him refuse them everyday. Terashima exclaims won’t he accommodate them. Haru apologizes and says that his family’s Mitsuyoshi is quite narrow-minded about liking Western things. Terashima exclaims if that ‘brother’ [Micchan] actually is.. [Ah, I think it is about treating them for free, or something.]
While Haru is laughing with the others, Asako looks aghast and sad. She asks what this is, how come Haru can talk normally with his classmates. Surprised Haru exclaims if that is normal, just now is normal. Sweatdropping, Asako says that it is because before, he would have a ‘wanna kill you’ stare. Blushing Haru says how can he say it..lately, their feelings[/thoughts] connected, and possibly, it is because he no longer has that strange attitude. Covering her face, Asako laments that by himself, he had become like an adult. Embarrassed Haru tells her not to ask anymore. While serving tea to Shizuku, Iyo mutters about the practice hitting baseball place. Then, she suddenly sits beside Haru and asks him why he lives in that kind of place. Surprised Haru asks her what it is, don’t sit too close to him. Just when Iyo is saying something, Chizuru calls out to Haru to quickly give to the teacher the course questionnaire. She stops talking upon noticing that Shizuku, Haru and Iyo looking at her. Blurb: “It’s the first time that they’ve met.” Looking away, aghast Chizuru apologizes that she came at a strange time. Haru asks Chizuru what’s up that she is looking away. Iyo asks who that girl is. Shizuku says that it is Ooshima-chan. While looking down to Haru and others, Terashima says that Asako is running away and it’s bad for it seems that they had an argument. Yano asks if it is because they will go together [to the game center] and Asako hates that. Sitting down behind the wall, Sasayan tells them to forget about Asako for anyway, it is because she said something that no one could understand. Glasses friend says that is quite rare, and is he angry at her again. He also tells Sasayan that he always sees him quarreling with Asako and mutually, not minding the other. Sasayan is surprised by that that he asks if he gives off that kind of feeling. While the others are teasing Yano, Sasayan slithers down to the floor and says that it is because Asako always single-handedly make things a mess, and she always has this strange inferiority complex. One-on-one, he can’t cope up with her. Blurb: “Shitayanagi-kun..always felt that he is easily teased.” Glasses guy tells Sasayan that actually, he thinks that Shizuku, Haru and Asako are not easily approachable [/get near to]. Terashima says that like Haru, at the start is really something, because he is very scared of Haru. Sako says that’s right for upon entering the classroom, Haru exclaimed ‘is there’s any objections!’. Yano says that upon talking with him, he turns out to be quite interesting, and he knows a lot of detailed stuff regarding mice. Other friend says that right now, only Sasayan is inseparably close with those guys. Sasayan admits that he also think that way but in the end, even if he did his best, for Asako, he is only an outsider and honestly, he doesn’t have self-confidence. Then, Sasayan thinks that Asako is similar like that person. [<- probably Haru].
Blurb: “Cleaning period..always doing ‘Otaku girl’s delivery service” [<- probably meant blogging and other internet stuff] While holding a dustpan, Asako’s expression sours upon seeing Sasayan holding a broom. Sasayan quietly sweeps the leaves to Asako’s dustpan. To Asako’s surprise, Sasayan asks her if she is going to Tencho’s place today, and if she isn’t, then forget about it. Looking away, Asako tells him not to trouble himself about that, for she and EVERYONE else will be going to see Micchan, and even without Sasayan, it is TOTALLY ALRIGHT!! Sasayan frowns about that. Turning to leave, Sasayan says okay, she should strive to do her best. Asako thinks that for Sasayan, she is only a useless, ‘can’t do anything right’ person. Sasayan thinks that for Asako, he is only a ‘boy’, and most probably, one of the enemies. Later on, walking towards the game center, Iyo is holding tight on to Shizuku’s bag. Iyo says that this seems to be a shady place and she is a bit afraid, is Haru really here. Shizuku tells her not to pull, and Haru went to leave the luggage. Iyo asks if Haru really lives in this kind of place, and isn’t he someone from the Yoshida family. Then, she says that there is a chicken-like guy over there. [<- punk hair; there are also a person with tattoo there] Puzzled Shizuku tells her not to look [at that person], and who knows..for Haru said that he severed relationship with his father but she doesn’t know the details of the situation. “Haru didn’t tell me anything [about that]..” This surprises Iyo. She laughs and asks if Shizuku wasn’t able to get Haru’s trust yet. After telling her to leave the luggage[/bags] there, Shizuku asks her if Yamaken is doing well. Iyo says that his brother is quite lively because he got angry at their mother because there are his hated carrots in his breakfast this morning. Shizuku says is that so. Then, the baseball team members enter the game center. They greet Shizuku and Iyo who were sitting by the lounge. It is already dark outside. Iyo asks how come Asako didn’t come with them. Shizuku says that it is because Asako got a low grade at the end of vacation quiz. Blurb: “Natsume-chan..of course, didn’t finish the summer homework.” Standing outside the game center, Asako thinks that in the end, she has been totally dumped by Micchan. She tells herself not to think that, for right now, she is all by herself and this is the first for her to go in, and she feels embarrassed as if she is going to get an injection. Her plan is just to say ‘hi’, and then the situation ought to be happy again. Then, she goes in. Upon climbing the stairs, she sees Micchan talking on the phone outside his store. She thinks that it will be one-on-one, what to do, it seems that he is on the phone. While troubled to the max, Asako thinks that she is already came, so she should just greet him and act normal. While Asako is still contemplating on this, Sasayan, who was standing behind her, exclaims, “Hello! Tencho-” Noticing them, Sasayan greets both Sasayan and Asako. He tells Sasayan that his classmates are already inside. He also tells Asako that she is late for Shizuku and others are also inside. Asako says that it can’t be helped for the questions in the make-up exam are quite thorny. Flustered Asako looks at Sasayan’s back.
Inside, while Iyo is holding a hand gripper and is curious about it, Asako is happily showing her the things inside like some water plants, towel handle, etc. At the counter, Micchan gives Shizuku some germs/bacteria that can be used to sterilize the water [to make it safe to drink]. While Haru looks on, Shizuku thanks him. Micchan smiles at Shizuku and tells her that [he’ll] give Haru to her. Shizuku is puzzled by what he said. Haru is distracted by someone coming in. It is Yuuzan who greets them a good evening. He angrily complains if Micchan has heard, and he would really want them to let go of him already for that stinky father of his would, one thing after another.. Then, he sees Haru quickly running off. And then, Haru quickly returns. =P Shizuku comments that he came back. Micchan nervously tells ‘prepared to fight’ Haru that is very good, he did well to come back, so they should get along with each other. Ready to pounce/attack, Haru asks Yuuzan what he is doing there. “Quickly go back, you natural perm. If you dare take one more step, I’m going to kill you.” Micchan tells Haru not to say that for he is also [curly] like Yuuzan. Pulling up his hair and not moving, Yuuzan says that he didn’t go there for him. While Micchan is telling him to stop even if he knows that he [Yuuzan] is very fed up, Yuuzan says that Haru is still without worries, and only has a girlfriend, that’s all. The others look aghast over that. They were interrupted when they hear something drops on the floor. It is Iyo. She had dropped that hand gripper and calls out that it is Möbius-sama. Blushing, Iyo asks what Yuuzan’s name is. Yuuzan asks if she is Haru’s friend, he is Yoshida Yuuzan, and his younger brother must have given her trouble. While Yuuzan looks puzzled and Haru looks serious, Iyo felt troubled for he is Haru’s brother. Just when Yuuzan is telling Micchan to go out for a while because he wants to talk with him, Micchan exclaims for him to wait for a while. To Yuuzan’s surprise, Iyo asks him, “Can I ask, do you have a girlfriend?” Blushing and puzzled, Yuuzan says he doesn’t have one. Blushing Iyo asks if he has taken a fancy on someone. Looking tense, Yuuzan says none..and he is quite troubled if she’s too close to him. Blushing really red and looking tense, Yuuzan exclaims to Micchan that he’ll come back next time. Iyo calls out to him, “Möbi..Haru-senpai’s brother!!” As Yuuzan quickly leaves, Micchan covers his face as he tries to suppress his laughter. Haru quietly watches them and realizes something. While Micchan is laughing, Haru puts his arm around Iyo and happily says that she unexpectedly did it. This made Iyo blush. Then, Shizuku looks surprised over this scene. Haru kept on laughing and asks Micchan if he saw Yuuzan’s face. Laughing Micchan exclaims that he [Yuuzan] is such a useless guy. Then, Micchan stops to tell Haru to let go because Shizuku is looking at him. Noticing that Shizuku is frowning with arms crossed, Haru quickly lets go of Iyo and tells her that it isn’t like that, this is a ‘jumping for joy in celebration of one’s victory’-type of feeling. Blurb: “This year, everyone please look after [/support] ‘Tonari no Kaibutsu-kun’ even more.”
At the baseball hitting range, Yano asks Sasayan if he isn’t going to play anymore. Wiping his perspiration, Sasayan says that he is going to rest for a while and get something to drink. While drinking, Sasayan sits by the wall where there is a window. Sasayan is surprised when Asako whispers out to him from the window and says that he is finally alone. After saying that he was surprised, Sasayan asks her what the matter is since she is talking to him normally. Asako thanks him for what he did a while ago, and also about that day at the festival. She admits that she always wanted to become like him even if it totally can’t be as she wished. Sasayan tells her that it is possible that she has misunderstood him and just like what she said, he isn’t a guy who can see everything clearly. “Right now, I was snubbed, and what can I say but I’m angry and dejected.” Asako says, “..I’m truly sorry. I’m very happy talking with you. It is very rare to have a guy like you, Sasayan-kun, who won’t be polite [/unrestrained] and got angry at me. Because Sasayan is a guy, I certainly was able to quarrel with you without any misgivings. *lowering head to the window sill* ..what I want to say is I want to be always be your friend.” Blushing Sasayan somewhat pouts. Rubbing his face, Sasayan tells her that towards her, when he sees her, he feels very jittery. Aghast and teary-eyed, Asako tells him to wait, is he criticizing her, and she is already in that difficult situation of coming [to make peace with him]. Sasayan says that he is saying that she wasted her enthusiasm and bravery in coming forward, and saying that she always loses the long winding road. [<-Either fall for someone who doesn’t like her or dumping a guy immediately?] “So, I’m thinking whether or not, you got hurt. No matter what, you also shouldn’t run away.” Asako looks at him in surprised. Moved by what he said, blushing Asako asks if they have made up. Sasayan looks at her and smiles. Standing up to face her, smiling Sasayan apologizes to her. Smiling Asako happily says that it is mutual. Holding out her hand for a hand shake, Asako tells him, “I’m really sorry about that strange misunderstanding that happened between us today. Friendship revived! Okay!” Smiling Sasayan says, “Yup. Ah, but you weren’t mistaken. I pretty much like you, Natsume. *Asako’s smile freezes then she goes into shock* It’s because you are always saying [/jumping into] the wrong conclusion[/assumption]. *irritated* I was so angry that I answered back at you. For me to like you just because we held hands, it’s like I’m an idiot, okay? *smiling* Even if it is me, I also won’t hold hands with someone whom I don’t like!” Aghast Asako is freaking out. =P
Buying a can of red tea from the vending machine, Haru happily says that Iyo did great, and let’s drink together, treat it as a small thank you gift. Iyo thanks him. Haru says that it is really interesting, and next time, when that guy comes, he’ll leave it up to her. Iyo happily says okay, she’ll do her best. At the hitting range, Yano and others are surprised that Shizuku wants to play the practice hitting baseball and someone asks if she is a bit reckless. Back inside, Iyo is holding the can of red tea. She says that for her, he [Haru] is also okay. Haru laughs and says that them siblings [Yamaken and Iyo] really have no ethics [/morals]. Iyo says that it turns out that Haru has an older brother, and in the end, will his brother inherit [/succeed] the main family [/estate]. Haru looks at her in surprise. While Haru buys some more drinks, Iyo says that he is from the Yoshida family, right. She heard this from the conversations between her brother and those ruffians. After a pause, Iyo says that the family ought to be succeeded by the eldest brother and how to say it, is the side of the main family alright because it looks very serious when she saw it on the television. A bit tense and serious, Haru tells her not to talk about that thing in front of Shizuku. Iyo asks why. Haru says that it is because he doesn’t want her to know about it. Iyo remembers Shizuku telling her that Haru didn’t tell him anything. As Haru walks back with the drinks, Iyo tells Haru, is that so, although she feels that it would be better to tell Shizuku. At this time, Asako exclaims that this and what he said before is totally different. Sasayan lamely says that’s right, and he is saying that it is okay for it to be like this today, since he is already tired, and anyway, they are friends right now. At the hitting range, someone shouts for Shizuku that she got it wrong, look at the ball, look at the ball. Shizuku exclaims why she has to look away before swinging the bat. Blurb: “Second school term starts. A new season..a premonition of something is starting to slowly change--”
Scans by 離境漢化組

Vampire Knight [Chapter 80]

2012-02-27T18:41:00.002+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 22, 2012

Title: Love’s Confession Flashback to the time when Kaname revealed his past through a dream to Yuuki..Ruka was there. She had CARELESSLY heard it clearly, this thing about ‘not leaving a single trace of Pureblood’. It is a reason that until the end, she couldn’t accept. Surprised Ruka asked him what about the one who is in his embrace. Wiping the blood from Yuuki’s face, Kaname said that ‘will become..a hindrance’. Ruka asked if that is okay to say those things to his partner when he obviously cherished her. If that is so, then won’t it be okay if he just straightforwardly let her go without a care while they were in school, and this is quite pitiful [for Yuuki?]. Ruka thought that he, too, has a distinct importance [to her?]. She told him that he is quite cruel for she thought that she can finally be at ease. Looking serious, Ruka proposed that he make her into his accomplice so-- End flashback. While Kain is taking Ruka away, Ruka tells him to wait, there is no need to run away and Hanabusa will understand if they talked with him. Kain says that he doesn’t think so, and now, he doesn’t want her to be sad again. Ruka pushes him away and tells him not to treat her like some weak girl. She says that she knows that perhaps she might be of ‘some’ help, and she knows that repeatedly shouldering this serious thing is tiring but she doesn’t want that because of this thing, he’ll worry about her. Kain frowns while Ruka looks at the dorm and feels nostalgic over the Sun Dorm. Kain apologizes over taking [their] time too much. Ruka says that it is alright, it will start soon – making the humans sleep in deep slumber and absolutely not let them go out of the Sun Dorm. She says that at the other side, Kaname-sama will suppress Sara so she can’t allow any slip-ups. While Ruka starts to use her powers, Kain notices that there are people at the side of the building. It is Yori and the others. After trying to recall Ruka, Kageyama points to Ruka and exclaims that he remembers her, Miss Ruka. To his shock, Ruka and Kain don’t remember him. =P While Kageyama weeps, Ruka tells them to go back in the dorm if they won’t want to get involved into some scary stuff. Then, slightly blushing Ruka tells Kageyama that she is happy that he likes her to the point of remembering her again. As Ruka looks away, Kageyama and Yori blush. Ruka tells them to quickly go for the scary vampire might attack people who are awake.

Flashback: Sara told Takuma that there is no other scarier vampire than her, no other vampire who makes others obey her, and having such a rare pure blood. Takuma said that he has been ‘captured’ [/captivated] by this pureblood named Shirabuki Sara. “I’ve always wanted to have you.” There is a scene of Sara looking at young Takuma greeting his grandfather[?] at a party. Then, it seems that Sara is kissing Takuma and Takuma is thinking that those words can be treated as love’s confession. Then, there is another flashback of Yuuki telling Takuma that he likes Kaname. And then, Sara slammed Takuma on the wall and said that it seems that he doesn’t understand. Takuma is then thinking that it is like a jealous confession. Takuma smiled and asked if he is already a hindrance after she got sufficient information about Kaname from him. Sara said that she told him that she wanted to have him, who fearlessly smiles at Kaname’s side. While Takuma thinks of her as a persistent pureblood who doesn’t show any intensity[/expressions?], Sara wanted to become someone who is more intelligent than Rido and Shizuka. Compared to the hypocrite Council of Ancient’s flowery words, opposing her words is a must. [<- I’m not sure about this one ^^;] Takuma wondered what to do, for he heard it as some sort of twisted way of expressing love. He asked her if aside from him, there is no one else. Sara said none. Takuma is very satisfied with that answer, for one of the pureblood that is feared by vampires belongs only to him. Sara said that Takuma thought that it is on his own [free] will, that he is by her side, keeping a close watch over her but he is mistaken because he is a flying moth, and she is the fire. Takuma couldn’t deny it since it is a vampire’s inborn instinct. Without a cure, vampires cannot help but be seduced by purebloods. And perhaps, he is always had been like that [when he clings on to young Kaname]. And, in the end, this is the result, the more he is imprisoned by Sara, he realized that he is also imprisoned by Kaname. End flashback.
Kaname had drawn his hunter’s sword and places it in front of Takuma. Kaname’s left hand had been reduced to bones from holding the sword. Takuma tells Sara to retreat first because Kaname is using a sword for [killing] vampires. Then, Senri and fangirl come in. In the form of bats, Kaname quickly retreats to the window. Hugging Takuma from behind, Sara said that it seems to be very dangerous to keep on staying in this place. While looking surprised, Takuma thinks that it is like iron sand being attracted to magnet. Outside, Ruka, together with Kain, looks up and calls out to Kaname-sama. From the bats, Kaname formed back into human form. And, from behind them, Yuuki, who is carrying Artemis, says that she has found him. Kaname turns to look at her. Back in the Night Dorm, fangirls are going to Sara because they were worried about her. Sara tells Zero that it is too bad that Kaname escaped because he arrived. Just when Zero turns to leave, Sara says that she has a request. That is to help her and these children[/fangirls] to hide ~~from~~ IN the Association. [Thanks for the correction, mariangie and bk1] While Zero glares at her, Senri calls out to Takuma if what Sara said is true. Takuma just mutters Senri’s name and Senri looks tense. Sara tells Zero that she isn’t taking advantage of it [/he’ll get something out of it], she will help him with his revenge. Flashback: After Zero pulled away from Yuuki, Yuuki grabbed his wrist and told him that she will chase after Kaname’s scent, and he go protect Sara..for now. She asked him what he thought of it [that idea], but Zero didn’t answer. Yuuki told him that it is alright, it won’t be like what happened just now, she can properly do it. That guy is also a vampire, and she clearly knows the weakness of a vampire [and] because she isn’t worried about him [Zero]. Zero didn’t react as Yuuki let go of his wrist End flashback. While hugging her fangirls, Sara asks Zero what about it. After thinking, Zero looks at her and holds out his hand. He says, “..okay.”
Scans by 玖玖爱枢♀汉化

Kurobara Alice [Chapter 26]

2012-02-27T18:40:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 19, 2012

Flashback: Azusa’s friends are telling her that her taste in [/how she views] men is awful. One of them said that if it were her, she wouldn’t have rejected that guy because he is quite suitable for marriage. Azusa insisted that there is no ‘electricity’/love with that person so how could she even talk about marriage with that person. Her friends smiled and said that in the end, she is talking about love, and her way of probing is quite eccentric. End flashback. Alice wakes up and thinks that she dreamt of being Azusa. She laments that even if she has a different kind of life now, her incurable side is still the same. In the other room, Akari wakes Dimitri up and tells him that she wants a date to Tokyo’s famous spots. Sleepy Dimitri tells her that vampires turn into dust in the morning but Akari doesn’t believe him. Then, Alice goes down to the dining room. She asks Reiji about Dimitri and his bride. To her shock, Reiji tells her that those two slept together. Tense but trying to act normal, Alice says that it has nothing to do with her and she is just curious where they are. Preparing to eat, Alice also says that she understands that they are lovey-dovey in bed, so before bumping into them, she’ll eat breakfast first. Reiji tells her that the two had left for a date to visit Tokyo’s famous spots. Alice quietly looks tense and mentally calls herself stupid because for things to turn out like this, she would only have to choose between the twins. She wonders if she was mistaken in thinking that something had happened with the twins, because upon her return, Kai had become very quiet. Reiji teases Alice not to have that kind of expression for he only told her that they slept together, not, doing it together. Reiji says that maybe he said it wrong for if they did do it, then Dimitri would already be dead. Flustered Alice says that he is right. Alice wonders if he was like this before, and if he was like that early on, she would have chosen him. Then, remembering what her friends told her before, she thinks that they would have meant about choosing Leo. She thinks that it would be rude to the twins if she would just say, ‘Okay, I choose you’ to decide on it. She wonders why she is still staying in this place.

After sightseeing and shopping, Dimitri and Akari are at Odaiba [large artificial island in Tokyo Bay Source: wiki] Akari is exclaiming that it is an Odaiba date, which is like a dream for her. Dimitri comments that for people from Tokyo, it is something ‘cliche’. Akari says that she knows but for her who is from the province, it is a dream. Dimitri starts to thank her for becoming an outstanding woman and it must have been very hard for her after he left her. Akari smiles and tells him that he has always been her light as she went through school and other things. She always have this hope that one day, the vampire will come and get her. With that thought, she strive to become someone who won’t disappoint him, and just like before, he currently gave light to her and he has proven to her that with intense feeling supporting oneself, one day, she’ll attain happiness. She tells him that from then till now, and now till later on, he is her most amazing prince. Just when Dimitri is going to explain something, Akari hugs him and apologizes to him for she can’t be his bride. This surprises Dimitri. Akari starts telling him that she is currently in the import groceries through mail business with a friend, and it is slowing picking up. She enjoys this kind of work and her world is opening up so she doesn’t want to stop doing it. Still surprised, Dimitri just says that is amazing but.. Then, Akari tells him that she is currently going steady with someone else, and he is a very nice and kind person. To Dimitri’s shock, Akari had told her boyfriend about this trip and he has given her permission. She assures Dimitri that she didn’t tell him that Dimitri is a vampire but she told him that Dimitri is someone who helped her when she was young. Her boyfriend told her to go and fulfill her dream, while he’ll wait for her to return. That dream is one day, the prince will come to take her to become his bride and bring her to his castle. She thanks Dimitri for fulfilling her dream but sorry, she did what he told her about striving hard to become what she’ll consider to be an outstanding woman but because of that, she can’t be his bride. Akari apologizes again and tells him that she’ll go ride a plane back. While Dimitri still look somewhat surprised, Akari tells him that she hopes he’ll find a more outstanding bride. Waving goodbye, she thanks him, and she’ll always like him so take care. Dimitri just keeps still with that frozen smile. =P
Soon, Dimitri returns home and Alice is having tea at the dining room. She welcomes him back. After he sits on the chair, Alice asks where his bride is, didn’t they go sightseeing. Looking away, Dimitri says that she went home, riding the last flight back. Alice says that she understands, Akari went to get her luggage before formally marrying off. Dimitri tells her that Akari won’t be coming back anymore. He won’t be breeding with her for she has a job and a boyfriend. After looking at him, Alice asks if he was dumped. Dimitri just looks tense and didn’t answer. Then, Alice exclaims if Akari said something like sorry, and the background is night scene of Odaiba..that is too cliche and too silly. Dimitri just looks tense while looking sideways. He tells her that he plans to reject her but then, Akari said it first so it is like ladies first. Alice doesn’t believe him and asks why he would reject that frank, cute and sunny girl. Dimitri seriously tells her that he plans on telling Akari that he has someone whom he likes. Alice says is that so. Then, she sips her tea. Dimitri asks why she is so calm. Alice asks why would she freak out for didn’t he brought that girl here to breed with him so how can he just let her go. Dimitri admits that Akari is a girl whom he prepared to breed with before, and it is true that he went to see how she was doing but, it is only that. It is because Akari was so happy and saying about going back to Tokyo with him that he couldn’t refuse. At that time, he planned to explain things clearly to her and then, send her back to Hokkaido, that’s it. He asks her about her and Kouya for didn’t he tell her to not think of anything and just go with him. Alice says that she went, made Kouya give up on her, and she returned here to wait for him [/Dimitri]. She planned to wait for his return and then, with resolve tell him clearly that ‘I’ve decided to choose you’. To Alice’s irritation, he asks her, ‘choose me [for] what’. After a pause, Dimitri exclaims could it be.. Standing up and embarrassed, Alice exclaims in disbelief as to what he thinks the reason is for her to keep staying there, and he really makes her speechless. Dimitri says that it is because she suddenly blurted it out that it seems unreal. Furious Alice exclaims for him to forget about that. Dimitri holds her wrist to prevent her from leaving and asks her if she really thought of it carefully, why him and not either of the twins. He tells her that he thought that she couldn’t feel his feelings for her. Alice says that until now, she couldn’t feel his feelings for her but then, it doesn’t matter. She couldn’t find the answer using common sense so she decided to choose a person with more common sense. And, Toko said before about a guy making one lose calmness is a bad guy and she agrees [<- not sure on this one ^^;] so, she chose someone who has the ability to make her lose her calmness, someone who can make her lose control of her common sense.
Dimitri lets her hand go and says that this is quite a complicated feeling for he couldn’t be happy from deep within his heart. Alice asks if it is because he doesn’t want to die. Dimitri denies it and says that for him, his feelings for her are very important and he didn’t seem to have properly conveyed it to her. He asks her how much of his true feelings did she felt. Alice said that didn’t she say that she doesn’t need his feelings because if it is about who likes her the most, then, she would have gone with Kouya, don’t he understand that. Dimitri exclaims that even if it is him, there is also love, and does she understand that. For him to stand in front of her like that, he is truly facing her [as Alice], and not Agnieska. Alice exclaims that she doesn’t need his explanation for even if she tries to understand, but whatever he truly feels and thinks, whatever the truth is, in the end, everyone still won’t be able to understand because this body is fundamentally Agnieska’s, and it is something that can’t be clearly distinguished so she had already decided not to be confused by it. She tells him that it is okay if he kept on insisting that, she won’t refute nor question him, and that ought to satisfy him. Dimitri sadly says that for her to refuse that way, then it will just be a one-sided love for her and he dies. For her to refuse that way, he is in pain that he couldn’t hug her nor touch a single hair of hers. Alice looks at him and says is that so. Turning to go upstairs, Alice says that he refused her twice already so okay, she knows already so forget it. He calls out to her but she says that she’ll choose Reiji. He calls out her name and exclaims that didn’t he say from the very start that she and Agnieska are totally different, and for her to keep on thinking about Agnieska-something, that is an insult for him since Agnieska fundamentally can’t speak Japanese, won’t eat food that can influence her shape [= become fat], nor suddenly become mad. He exclaims that Agnieska is more..more.. but because of Alice, he no longer thinks of Agnieska even when he decided not to forget her..still she slowly disappeared from his heart from the day Alice woke up. Flustered Alice sarcastically apologizes to him that his precious memories had been destroyed by someone vulgar like her. Then, Alice loses her footing and falls down. Dimitri manages to catches her. Alice apologizes and Dimitri hugs her tighter. She apologizes again that she said too much and she isn’t like that in front of others. Dimitri says that he knows because ever since from the start, he had been paying attention to her. Just when he points her face towards him to kiss her, he stops and stands up. He says that no matter what he does to that body, his feelings couldn’t be conveyed to her. As he goes upstairs, he stops and says that she wants proof, so does he. Alice just looks on as Dimitri continues to go upstairs. From the blurb, [I can only understand that] the next chapter will be the end of the first part [/arc of the story].
Scans by 動漫花園S組.

Kyou no Kira-kun [Chapter 6]

2012-02-19T20:26:00.001+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 17, 2012

Nino peeks in the slightly open door and overhears someone saying, “Mio-sensei, I like you.” While Nino looks surprised, Sensei peeks in the door because he recognizes that voice. He also looks surprised as he sees Mio and Kira lovingly looking at each other. Then, Mio turns to look at the door. This surprises Nino that she quickly turns around to leave. Narration: “Before, there was someone who said, ‘The sky is going to fall down’. This can also be used to express that one GOT A MAJOR SHOCK.” While holding her notebook, trembling Nino quickly walks at the hallway and returns to her classroom. Blushing Nino thinks that if she sorts out her train of thoughts, Kira was confessing [his love at that time], and the other party is the clinic teacher, wearing a long white coat. “And, it was quite likely that I had exchanged glances with that teacher. *Sensei knowingly looks at Nino as the teacher in the classroom tells them to turn over the page of the book* --In short, *blushes and looks sad* that woman is the person whom Kira-kun likes.” During class break, while everyone is chatting, Nino holds the notebook and thinks that in the end, she wasn’t able to show it to Kira but then, it’s okay if she couldn’t. She is surprised to see Kira coming in and asking again the two girls who joined them before, if they want to prepare for the school festival with him[/them]. The girl apologizes and says that even if she would want to be with him, she has work. Kira just says, is that so. Nino thinks that Kira-kun came back and he was rejected again. Just when Kira is going to sit down, he notices Nino, looking at his direction. He calls out to her and greets her a good morning. Then, Nino quickly looks away. This surprises Kira. Holding her notebook, Nino thinks that is strange, what is she doing..

Yabe laughs and puts his arm around Kira. Yabe says, “Hey, Kira, finally even that Bird Girl wants to abandon you, right? You were just snubbed a while ago.” Tense Nino quickly turns around to Kira and thinks that it is Shit Guy. Yabe continues to tell Kira that lately, he had become quite pitiful in his [Yabe] sight. “It’s already enough. Just go back to your cool self before, and once again, hang out with me and go all out.” Somewhat in thinking pose, Kira says that actually, the former him was said to be quite arrogant by others. “[I’m] Great in fighting, well-off and popular with girls, even if right now, I still am. *pushes Yabe to the wall* But, this is quite a coincidence, Yabe. Don’t you know that I also quite LIKE YOU BEFORE. ‘Go back to your cool self before, and once again, hang out with me and go all out.’” Yabe blushes and mutters, ‘li..like?’ ^^; Nino and others wonder what happened. Nino thinks that Kira is just like in the past [/same as always]. Later on, the teacher tells the students if they got the data sheets. The student sitting in front of Nino calls out to the teacher that the sheets are not enough, for the three people behind him. The teacher tells Nino to go and get some of the sheets. While walking at the hallway, Nino thinks that she wasn’t able to talk with Kira because classes had already started, and he definitely thinks that she was weird a while ago. While holding her hair that is flown by the strong wind, Nino sees Mio walking towards her. Looking tense, Nino timidly passes by her. She wonders if Mio didn’t notice her earlier because they had already passed each other. Nino freezes when Mio turns around and asks if she is the girl [outside the clinic] this morning. Nino turns around to face Mio and thinks that it turns out that she has already been found out. Mio says that she caught a glance of the long hair, and since she [Nino] has a bird with her all day, she must be Okamura Nino. “Kira had mentioned about you. He said that he found a friend whom he can share [his] secret/s with.”

Surprised, Nino asks her if she knew about Kira’s illness. Mio says that she does because she and the homeroom teacher had been informed about it, just in case, something happens. After a pause, Mio says that at the clinic, Nino has seen everything so can she keep quiet about it. “But for the time being, I don’t have plans to go steady with him.” This surprises Nino. She exclaims why, is it because their status isn’t the same. “Kira is quite [a] remarkable [guy].” Mio laughs and says, “Not only that, he also looks handsome. But, you ought to know why, right? *Nino looks surprised and tense as she thinks ‘what?’* Because it can be said that that person is someone who doesn’t have a future. How can I possibly be together with that kind of person. *Nino is shock* Okay, class is still going on so you should quickly go back.” As Mio walks away, Nino looks dark as the strong wind blows her hair. In section 1-5, Kira goes to Nino and asks her why she snubbed him. “And besides that, there is still the school festival stuff. I also want to properly discuss with you about what else we should prepare.” Still looking dark, Nino didn’t react. Kira angrily holds her chin to make her face him. He asks her if she is listening. Kira is surprised when she suddenly slaps his hand away and seriously looks at him. Looking surprised, Kira mutters, “Okamura..?” Then, Nino snaps out of it and looks tense. She looks down and quickly stands up from her chair. Nino runs out of the classroom and wonders, ‘why’. Going out the door, Kira calls out to her and asks, why.. Then, he suddenly felt an increasing pain. Outside by the stairs, Nino catches her breath and asks Sensei what’s going on with her. Sensei tells her that he knows that she is very angry at that clinic oneesan. Nino says, but Kira-kun also didn’t do anything wrong. Sensei tells her that it is alright, she just go back and act normal like before. Flustered, Nino says okay. Sensei just looks knowingly at Nino.

Then, in the class, Nino looks at Kira’s empty seat and thinks that fundamentally she ought to have concentrated all her energy in preparing for the school festival. At the gate of Kira’s house, Tiara meets up with Nino who informs her that Kira is in the hospital. Carrying a small bag of Kira’s things, Tiara tells her not to worry for it is just a minor flare-up, but to be sure, Kira would have to rest up for 2-3 days for a check-up[/observation]. Nino looks worried. At the hospital, Kira is dreaming of the past. Flashback: While everyone is busy preparing for the school festival, a glasses guy told him that the whole class is going to prepare for the school festival, and won’t Kira and the others join them. One of Kira’s buddies said that he is annoying. Yabe[?/someone else] said how is it possible that they’ll join them in doing such a troublesome thing so quickly get lost. Holding a pack of paper flowers, the glasses guy tensely told them not to say it that way, and why don’t everyone get along well..so let’s make some flowers. Kira kicked glasses guy who fell over. While everyone else screams, Kira stepped on glasses guy’s back. Kira told the guy, “Get along well? Don’t say such disgusting words, okay.” End flashback. Then, Kira wakes up and he is surprised to see Nino looking down on him. Nino calls out his name and says that he is awake. While Kira is puzzled why she is there, Nino worriedly asks how he is feeling and is he alright. Kira tells her that he is totally fine and everyone else is just exaggerating, and he was just sleeping. Relieved, Nino says is that so, then that’s good. Nino is puzzled why Kira is quietly looking at her. Then, she realizes something. She quickly apologizes to him and tells him that actually, nothing is going on. Kira just looks surprised. Standing up to leave, Nino tells him that she’ll call his father at the hallway where his father is talking with the doctor. Kira sits up and pats the bed beside him as if telling her to sit down. Puzzled Nino obediently sits beside him.

Just when Sensei asks Curly Hair what he is doing, he and Nino look shock when Kira takes off his shirt. Partly covering her face, blushing Nino exclaims in surprise. Flustered Sensei angrily shouts why he is taking his clothes off. Calm Kira tells her to look at his back. Nino and Sensei see two wing-like tattoos on his back. Kira tells them that he got it while he was in junior high. “Even if I want to erase it, there is no way of removing it. It’s just like the things that I have done before.” Nino looks somewhat flustered and puzzled. To her surprise, Kira says that fundamentally, she also doesn’t want to do it. “Then, let’s give up on the school festival. *rests his head on tense Nino’s shoulder* Ever since I was a child, I’m already weak and sickly so in order for people not to notice it, I would show off [my ability] to the extent of totally going astray. And, I also did a lot of things to hurt you. I’m truly awful. So when I truly became aware of it. *crying* It is already too late. For things to reach up to this point, it is fundamentally impossible to want to keep [/have] a relationship with everyone.” Nino looks flustered and wonders if it is truly too late. That night, Nino is sadly lying down on her bed. Sensei looks at her and asks if she is really bothered by what Curly Hair said. Flustered Nino says that she doesn’t know for even if she is already used to giving up but she felt quite depressed. Sensei looks serious and flies over to the table. After some flipping sound, Nino is surprised when Sensei starts to say, “‘Kira Yuuji is a strange person who can move[/waver] me’ *Nino looks surprised and turns to see that Sensei is reading her diary* Ah ah, so that’s how it is.” Blushing, Nino tries to grab the diary and exclaims to Sensei what he is doing. “Please stop, Sensei. It’s too embarrassing.” Flying with the diary, Sensei asks her what reason is she talking [/confused] about. “Isn’t it already written in the diary. Ever since you met that guy, you had started to change! You look here. Didn’t you made a firm resolution from the very start!?”

Nino looks at her September 16th entry. ‘Although, I still don’t understand what this feeling is but, I want to be with him in passing through these 365 days. I want to keep on living together with him.’ She looks intently on the ‘with him in passing through these 365 days’, and she remembers Mio telling her that Kira doesn’t have a future and how can she possibly be together with that kind of person. Then, there are two stickers on the page of the diary. One is a circle sticker with a heart with words ‘What you did is very amazing’ <- Sticker that Kira-kun gave me. And, there is a photo sticker of the three of them. <- My first purikura. Then, she remembers Kira happily telling her ‘that [scar] also represents that you had fought with that kind of thing before, right? Then, you are truly amazing.’ Teary-eyed and blushing, Nino smiles and thinks, “Ah yes, I’m already have ‘hope’[/wish].” There is a scene of Kira letting Nino listen to music from his phone[?]. He told her that this song is quite good. Wearing headphones, Nino happily listened and said that this song was broadcast in the advertisement yesterday. End flashback. Sensei quietly looks at Nino. Narration: “It is Kira-kun who made me, have hope.’ The next day, at the hospital, Kira’s cellphone rings. He is surprised to read a message from Nino saying, “This time, leave it to me to go and prove[/convince] ^∇^” Narration: “September 30th. I’ve already understand as to why I’m moved by him.” Standing in front of the classroom’s door, Nino exhales. She mutters, “Okay, I’ll go in.” She goes in the classroom where her classmates are busy chatting. She then says, “Ah..about that.” Everyone stops talking and looks at Nino. Narration: “This is really a feeling as if the sky is going to fall down. Kira-kun, I..” Looking determined, Nino looks up to everyone and says, “Everyone, let us prepare for the school festival together!” Narration: “..had fallen in love.”

Scans by 離境漢化組.

Black Bird [Chapter 62]

2012-02-19T20:22:00.002+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 16, 2012

Everyone is stunned by what Misao just said. Kyo says that she would even say ‘giving birth’, could it be that she has forgotten what will happen if she gives birth. Misao says that she’ll die. Just when Kyo is telling her that since she knows.., Misao tells him that she became aware of something much worst that will happen. Everyone just look glum and serious. Misao tells them that they actually know about it. Her brain has gone blank and this is quite silly but it is too cunning for Kyo to decide everything by himself at this time. This surprises Kyo. Just when he is about to protest, Misao says that the moment that she is with child, they can no longer return to their original lives. She asks if the saying about ‘the clan that will take the Immortal Fruit as a bride, will become prosperous’ is because the child will become very powerful. “If the child is killed, then Kyo can no longer continue on being the head of the clan. The worst case scenario is-- he will be chased after and killed. Of course, currently, no one can kill Kyo so Kyo can abandon the clansmen, and he will be able to successfully run away with me. That way, it would be necessary for me to abandon my mother and all of the other humans in this world. *trembling as she grips her hands together* But then, that is alright. Even if Sagami, Houki and the three kids say that they would go together with us, but then, how many will be our enemies? Not only the chasing soldiers of Tengu but all of the people around us can become our enemies. It is impossible for Kensuke and Tadanobu to hide us and we will have no place to go. Won’t it put Sagami and others into more danger!? Buzen and Zenki would also be in the same unfavorable situation. Even if they won’t go together with Kyo, actually they are returning back to the village to suppress those who oppose Kyo. Wrong, they will be put in more danger. Fundamentally, this is a situation wherein nine people dying for one. It is impossible to keep running to live and it will take a long time-! Then, one day we will be caught and I’ll be forced to separate from Kyo. (Kensuke made me conscious of this) In the end, I will be violated by whoever is going to replace Kyo as the new head. And, I’ll be pregnant and in the end, I’ll still die. (The only thing that I can choose is ‘how I’ll die’.) Family, Hachidai [/Eightdai Tengu] and the child in my belly and even Kyo! *Kyo looks tense and flustered* If I were to lose all of the people that I love then dying afterwards, I would rather die giving birth for my most beloved person. *crying* (The only thing that I don’t want to lose is the Kyo’s love for me.) *prostrating down to Kyo* I beg of you to please let me give birth to this child. I beg of you..!!”

Kyo grinds his teeth in frustration while the others are either crying or trying to stop themselves from crying. Buzen helps Misao up and tells her to stand up for being like that might harm the baby. Sagami tells Kyo that this is the limit since the Princess is already aware of everything. “It doesn’t matter to us if we die as long as you and the Princess.. will perhaps be able to attain happiness. But, just like what she said, it will end one day. If it is that kind of situation, what would be left? The Princess felt that it would be better to just give birth. There is no ‘best’ but only ‘better’ [way].” Kyo mutters, ‘better’ and is he saying that he gives up on Misao. Sagami tells him that no matter how, he will lose her but at least, leave behind the baby. Looking at his trembling hands, Kyo asks if he is just going to lose her upon attaining her. “Just for this goal, I’ve used up 10 years--..” He remembers the time when he is beaten up, he will go to the small pool to look at Misao when she was young till she grew up. And, whenever he tries to touch her, she ends up disappearing because it is only water he is grabbing. He imagines hugging Misao and she turns into water. “Just for this goal..” Teary-eyed Misao tells Kyo to live on if she dies. With a cold look in his eyes, Kyo says, “Ha?” Misao repeats that he live on if she dies for he can’t die with her. After a pause, Kyo asks her what this ‘can’t’ is. “Fundamentally, it is impossible for me to live on. After taking away your life, the world without you! How can I possibly live on. *laughs* You’ve said before that if I were to die, you’ll die with me. And right now, you are saying this kind of things to me.” Misao says that it is because before, they don’t have a baby. Kyo asks what the difference with having a baby, is. Misao asks him if he doesn’t want to live on for the baby. “This child is--..” Kyo shouts that it is impossible for him to love the baby because for him to be born, the mother will be sacrificed. “If he were to perhaps have some similarities with me..I can’t accept it. I don’t want to see him..!” Misao and the others are surprised and flustered by Kyo’s outburst. Misao tells him that it is his duty to bring up the child. Kyo casually says that if she is talking about father’s responsibility, then he, who was left on his own, had just inherited it [/copying from his father]. Touching her belly, Misao tells him that it isn’t only that for this child is currently very powerful and violent that he needs someone to guide him and help him in controlling this enormous strength. “If that isn’t done, it will gradually lead to disaster.”

Starting to walk away, Kyo says that he doesn’t know, because after she dies, he doesn’t care whatever happens to the world. Misao asks him if he can say that in front of the Hachidai. This surprises Kyo that he turns around to face Misao and the others. Misao continues to ask him if he can say that in front [face-to-face] to the people who used their very lives to protect them [M&K] and he doesn’t care what will happen to them. Kyo looks really flustered and tense. Holding Kyo’s arms, Misao ask him if what he told her before about there are others who are important is a lie. “Kyo, you must live on. *Kyo trembling and tense* Live on.” Kyo mutters, “No..” Misao repeats for him to live on. Kyo says that she can’t die. Then, Misao suddenly starts hitting Kyo with her closed fists and shouts that she herself doesn’t want to die. “I also want to live on. *crying* I also want to see the face of the child! I also want to be with you forever! *grips his kimono* Why.. *Kyo hugs her tight* Why must I die.. Why..!!” Then, for a moment, Kyo looks surprised for he thought Misao turned into water while he was hugging her..but she is still in his embrace. After looking startled, Kyo says, “As long as you won’t die then you can let you give birth to the child. It is okay as long as there is a way!” Misao mutters, ‘..that kind of way..’ Kyo asks if she is saying that he can’t possibly find it. “I will find it. I’ll definitely find it, a way for your life to continue-- *serious* It is absolutely impossible for me to give up on you..!!” Misao is surprised by this as her heart is beating excitedly. While the others call out to him, Kyo starts to carry Misao. They ask him where he is going for she needs rest. Kyo says that they’ll go back home. While Kyo walks away with her, Misao thinks that expression is the same when Kyo was young and told her that right now, he won’t do [for her] but he will make becoming the clan’s head as his goal. “Without concealing his intense anger.. that fierce beastlike expression.. Loudly shouting that you want me.. So cool.. [I] really like you.. At this time, I have thought of those things.. *holding tightly to Kyo* but I’m so happy that there are no words to express it.” At the village, someone says that it is the clan head’s orders to mobilize the whole clan and start flipping those antique books regarding any records about the Immortal Fruit and they are not to let go of any smallest clues.

At the hallway, Houki runs and calls out to his brother. While Houki is catching is breath, Sagami asks him what it is. He tells him that there is something that always bothered him so he went to confirm it. He was thinking if Shou had left some things behind. “Since it seems that he had finished reading the ‘Immortal Fruit Records’ and immediately dealt with it but I think that it is possible that he doesn’t have enough time to deal with [/dispose of] the things that he has..” Sagami tells him that the residence where Shou-sama lived has been thoroughly investigated. Taking out a piece of paper, Houki tells him that he found this hidden in the book cabinet, insert within a book. Opening the folded paper, Sagami wonders if it is a note. Then, he looks surprised. Houki tells his brother that it is Shou’s handwriting. “It is a portion of Shou-sama’s Immortal Fruit research that he had left behind..!” Blurb: “A ray of line shines on Kyo and Misao. The contents of Shou’s research is..!?” Scans by 水银工作室.

Kyou no Kira-kun [Chapter 5]

2012-02-19T20:19:00.002+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 15, 2012

Page 5 – Song that Can’t [/unable to] End. Narration: “Why do people strive so hard?” The teacher asks the students that he wants a last confirmation regarding their class won’t be opening up a store for the school festival. Someone raises up his hand and says that if they are enthusiastic about doing it, they would have put up a proposal early on. “Old Timer*, at this time, why are you still saying things about considering it?” [* I can’t find the exact word but it is pretty much calling him an ‘old man’ in a rude way.] The homeroom teacher sweatdrops over that. Someone else says that there are only two weeks left so who would do this kind of thing. The teacher angrily says that this class really does as they please, and don’t call him Old Timer, but rather, homeroom teacher. While the others are laughing, Nino is midway her knitting. She just sheepishly smiles and thinks that school festival has nothing to do with her at all. Sensei looks out the window and thinks that the weather is very nice. Then, someone raises his hand and says, “Old Timer.” Nino turns to look and is surprised that it is Kira. To everyone’s shock, Kira says that he actually wants to do something [for the festival]. At the hallway, during PE class, Nino asks Kira what’s up with him to suddenly say that. Sensei shouts that is right, and he hates those yakitori [roast chicken kebabs] type of stores for bird-type animals ought to be protected. Kira tells Nino that he already thought of something that he wants to do. He also tells the cuckold parrot to keep his voice down. Kira holds up a piece of paper to Nino. On it: Things I want to do before I die. 1. School [below it is 1 of the things he wants to do in school] -> 1. Seriously participate in school activities. Kira tells her that he has no way of participating in the running in the next PE class. During sports events, he got through it by cheating and pretense, so that means sports festival is out of the question. “So for me, the only one thing that I can put out all of my best effort is the school festival.” Nino hesitantly protests that they don’t have enough time and everyone doesn’t want to participate. Kira tells her that we have time during the fifth period class to consult the others about the division of work. Nino asks, ‘we’? Kira tells her that didn’t she say that she will help him with whatever is written on the paper. Pointing at Nino, smiling Kira says, “You and I are going to be school festival committee members so let’s get along [/yoroshiku]. While Nino is stunned, Sensei shouts that they can’t do a yakitori stand.

In class, everyone is also stunned when Kira is standing in front to tell everyone that he hopes that everyone will prepare together with them for the school festival. Nino is hiding behind Kira for she is scared of standing in front of the class. Someone says that it turns out that Kira isn’t joking around. Another says that it is like before, he is doing this together with that Bird girl. “What kind of relationship do those two have? By the way, she looked like a spirit behind his back.” A couple of girls say that they will join if Kira is going to take part. Surprised, Kira breaks into a smile and thanks them. “I’m super happy [to hear that]--” Everyone is surprised by Kira’s smile. Soon, others say that they will join. Someone says that they don’t have that much time but would they be able to do a cafe well since it needs a lot of casual labor. Another one says that if the girls are going to wear sexy maid outfits, then he’ll join. Nino peeks out from Kira’s back. She is surprised that everyone is acting into this. Yabe looks glum over this. Nino and Kira are surprised when Yabe calls out to the others if they really think that this is quite good. “Everyday after school, we have homework, right? And there are also club activities, right? And aren’t you guys very good friends? There might be some disputes in doing something together so properly think about it, you wanna-help fools.” The girl beside Yabe is smiling over this. Everyone look tense then they look at each other and agrees that what Yabe said is true and in the end, it is just too frivolous/foolish. Kira is surprised by that. The homeroom teacher says that is enough, and they can just think about a bit. He also tells them that later on, those who want to participate can just stay behind. Yabe smiles as he hears the other classmates saying that they do not want to do it anymore. Nino just looks down and thinks that she is really a fool for she obviously knew that it can’t be that easy. After school, the only ones left are the two girls who told Kira earlier that they will join. Nino thinks that it would be better if more people had stayed. One of the girls asks Kira says that they can’t do it with this number of people so perhaps, it can’t be done. Kira looks downcast but he says no, for Old Timer already extended the deadline for 2-3 days and he wants to participate in this. Nino just look sadly at Kira.

While taking a bath with Sensei, Nino says that in the end, it seems that Yabe has not reconciled with Kira. Sensei agrees with her and says that what Yabe said is quite correct though he doesn’t like it. Nino starts blowing bubbles in the water. She thinks that is true, and she wonders if it will go smoothly. Afterwards, Nino is wearing rabbit-hood pajamas. She is toweling her hair to dry. Then, she overhears a noise at the balcony. She opens the glass door to see Kira holding a small pack of paper flowers. He asks her to help him make some paper flowers. Nino asks him if he had already started making the decorations. Kira asks where the cuckold parrot is. Nino says that he is blow drying because he just got out of the bath. Looking at her, Kira asks if she is going to do that too because she is dripping wet. He tells her that he’ll wait for a while, before coming back. Puzzled, Nino says that she doesn’t blow dry and just let it dry naturally in the air. Kira looks surprised and sees a small puddle of water by Nino’s feet. The water is from her dripping wet hair. Kira angrily asks her if she didn’t notice that dripping by her feet. Soon, Kira is blow drying Nino’s hair. Kira scolds her that no wonder, her hair is a complete mess everyday and didn’t he say that he’ll make her[/she ought to be] a bit girly. “You’re treating yourself like some barbarian[/wild person]!! Towards strange things.. I really can’t help it [but help her].” Then, Nino glances at him to see him combing her hair with his fingers. She blushes and turns away. She wonders why she felt a bit hot. She tells him that is enough for she is this kind of strange person. Kira sighs and tells her that she is saying ‘this kind’ again and she hasn’t even put a lot of effort yet, and she dares to say that. Surprised, Nino looks at Kira and pouts. Looking away again, Nino says that ‘this’ is ‘this’, what about it. “I’ve always think that it isn’t that easy to change. I also didn’t think about it nor did I think of wanting to become some other person!!” Then, Kira gazes at her open nape. He holds her face and kisses her nape. [Amusing thing: According to wiki, the nape of a woman's neck held a strong attraction/highly erotic area for many Japanese men.] Nino looks surprised. Kira says, “It’s truly regretful that even if there is only a bit of desire[/hope], I would do it--” While he still holds her face, Nino starts to blush and shouts that is because he is very fickle [/like a playboy]. Kira says that he won’t deny it for men ‘really like girls’ by Girolamo. [Girolamo seems to refer to Gerolamo Cardano, an Italian Renaissance mathematician, physician, astrologer and gambler. Source: wiki. But the Chinese translator doesn’t know the connection of what Kira said and this person].

Then, Kira’s cellphone starts ringing-vibrating. Blushing Nino had put on her rabbit hood because her heart is beating fast. Kira looks surprised over the message. He stands up to leave and apologizes to her that they’ll do the flowers tomorrow for there is something he has to do first. Nino asks what that thing is. Somewhat smiling, Kira says, “Next time, we’ll properly talk about it..regarding the person whom I like.” Nino looks shock as Kira goes out and closes the door. Pulling down her hood, Nino sadly thinks is that so, since that ‘woman’ before is actually Kira’s father. “It turns out that there is someone whom he seriously likes.” In section 1-5, Kira and Nino look at some of the paper flowers on the table. Kira asks how many paper flowers they need to decorate the classroom since they already made 30. Nino says who knows, for it ought to be a lot more. Then, they were interrupted by the two classmates, the ones who volunteered to help. Nino thinks that they are from yesterday, could it be that they came to help. One of the girls apologizes to them for they can’t stay after school to help them since studying needs a lot of energy. The two [K&N] are surprised and Nino thinks that it turns out to be that. Kira asks if they won’t come again afterwards. The girls say that they won’t. They apologize and left. While wondering why it became like that, she overhears the other students saying that it seems that those girls have to study and they are afraid of trouble/inconvenience so they’ve said that. Someone sarcastically tells the other not to say it out loud for they [K&N] are quite pitiful. Nino looks tense over that because even if they persevere, later on.. Kira just kept quiet and serious. Then, a female teacher comes in and tells the students to go back to their seats for it is already the start of class. Kira suddenly slams his hands on the table and stands up. He goes up front to talk with the teacher. He asks her to give him 2 minutes. While everyone is puzzled, the equally puzzled teacher says that it is okay if it is only 2 minutes. Kira takes a chalk and draws a huge smiling emoticon on the blackboard. Lightly knocking on the board, Kira says, “Let me say, how about using this ‘smiley’ as the name of the cafe? *everyone looks surprise and Yabe just quietly looks on* What I’m saying might be annoying to you guys. Actually, I also think the same way as you all. I feel that preparing for the school festival is quite tiring. Everyone might be thinking that it is enough that only those who want to participate ought to be the ones to go and do it. But, I hope that everyone can be together and laugh happily[/have fun] as much as one wants. I want to cherish this current class more.” Nino is touched by what he said. The others seem to look surprise-touched by what he said.

Walking at the hallway with an empty garbage bin, Nino thinks that there was a line in throwing away the garbage and she unexpectedly was the last one [in line]. She also thinks that there ought to be some people who have gathered. Sensei tells Nino that what Kira said earlier is quite cool. Nino agrees with him. It gave her a bit of anticipation. She opens the classroom door and peeks in. She is surprised for no one is there except for Kira sitting and looking out the window. Nino can’t believe it, and Sensei looks a bit tense. She approaches Kira and calls out his name. They see him crying. Looking tense, Nino sprouts imaginary rabbit ears for it turns out that he is crying so what is she to do. Wiping his tears and pulling up his hair, Kira says, “Okumura, let us continue working on the preparations.” Nino looks surprised. As he looks at some papers, Kira says that they still have 10 days to go. Nino just looks at him and wonders, “Why?” She remembers the time when some kids had beaten her up. She asks, “Why do you have to give this much effort up to this extent? Right now, you[/we] are seriously preparing for this but in the end, isn’t it scary if there is no payback[/reciprocation]. *Kira quietly looks at her* Even if it is me, I couldn’t act without a care [about all this] so..” Kira suddenly grabs her wrist and made her hand touch his chest. He tells her, “It is because I’m still alive. So, even a little, I also don’t want to give up. It wasn’t easy for us to strive hard up and arrive at this point. [And,] because it is impossible to be scared and just be stuck at a standstill.” Nino blushes as she felt Kira’s heartbeat. Then, she bends down on the floor while supporting herself by hold the table. She says that she doesn’t feel good. Sensei flies up and scolds Kira that the things he say makes people embarrassed. Kira asks if that is so. That night, in her room, Sensei flies over to Nino and asks what she is doing. Writing on a notebook, she tells him that even if the people are few, she still wants to write down the division of work because who knows, maybe someone will come [and help them] tomorrow. This surprises Sensei and he knowingly glances at Nino. Narration: “September 28th. Lately, I’ve always have this feeling as if I had become an outsider[/bystander].” Before going to school, Nino gets an email from Kira telling her to go ahead to school because he decided to skip the first class. He wrote to her that he will be staying at the clinic but it isn’t because he is feeling ill.

Narration: “Kira-kun. There is always this unseen tenderness, not knowing what’s going on.” In the classroom, Nino looks at her cellphone again and wonders why Kira is staying at the clinic. Then, she sadly looks at the notebook which contains her notes for the preparation of the school festival. She wonders if she ought to show it to him. At the clinic, a short haired woman looks at Kira and giggles. She says that lately, Kira has been coming to the clinic. Kira says that didn’t she call him there and luckily, she is the [school] clinic teacher. “You are still worthy of your reputation [/not only in name but in reality] of being a devil.” Holding the notebook, Nino, together with Sensei, quickly walks at the hallway. Narration: “Kira-kun. Even if I won’t dare believe it but I also want to become someone who is capable of obtaining other people’s payback.” [<- getting something from what she did.] Blushing, Nino happily skips and wonders if Kira will be happy when he knows about it. Then, she arrives at the clinic to find the door ajar. She peeks in to see Kira sitting down on the foor in front of the teacher who is sitting on the table. While the teacher is smiling, Kira is holding her foot and seems to lean to kiss her shin. Kira says, “Mio-sensei, I like you.” Narration: “Because, I want to be at the closest place to you, and see your smile.” Judging from the kind of pose of Kira and Mio, it doesn’t seem like ‘romantic love’ in a way but more like Mio is manipulating/taking advantage of him or something. And, he did mention she is like a devil. Unless, of course that is the kind of S&M love Kira is into. ^^; He is really at her beck-and-call for he would drop everything whenever Mio calls for him to come. Since they are keeping the relationship a secret and Mio is the one beside Kira during this important time instead of Nino, it makes me wonder if Mio is already married or attached with someone else..so if she is lonely or something, she calls up Kira? I do wonder if Mio knows of Kira’s health condition. It makes me wonder if just like the author of Stardust Wink who also previously had a manga about teacher-student, this time around, they are showing the bad side of having such a relationship wherein it isn’t pure love.

Scans by 離境漢化組.

Kimi ni Todoke [Chapter 65]

2012-02-19T20:17:00.002+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 13, 2012

Cover page: “Actually, there are a lot of things that I want to tell you.” Soon, everyone is talking about the Christmas party on the 24th, their last day of classes for the year. A couple of classmates ask Sawako if she is coming. She asks if she can come. They then urge her to come. Sawako feels high about it because she has been asked to tell a Christmas ghost story. Ayane scolds her as to what this is about and why it became like this. Sawako just happily says that this is ‘the two of us spending Christmas together’. Ayane shouts at her that isn’t ‘the two of us’ but, ‘being together with everyone’. Ayane can’t help but feel helpless for Sawako is saying that she already said ‘be with everyone’. While Chizuru is still in a daze, Ayane asks Sawako if this is really alright. Sawako says yes, she did wanted to spend it with Shouta, and besides, it would be more fun if she spends it together with everyone especially Chizuru and Ayane. Chizuru tells Sawako that last year she wasn’t able to go. Ayane looks at Shouta direction and mentally asks him what’s going on. Shouta remembers when Sawako wanted to join the Christmas party last year. Kent goes to Shouta and asks him why he isn’t spending Christmas alone with Sawako and something about there’s no need to support Soichi who is very excited over the party. Shouta says that it isn’t so. Just before Shouta leaves, Kent asks if it is for Sawako. Blushing Shouta exclaims that he is annoying. Kent laughs and says that is love, and it isn’t easy for them to go steady so should it be better if they spend it with only the two of them. Surprised Shouta exclaims that that no [/can’t be] is no. When Soichi and friends call out to Shouta to look at something [for the party?], Shouta quickly leaves. Kent laughs and says what..it’s because of Shouta [himself/the problem is Shouta].

Then, Kent notices Ayane going out at the door. Pin had just opened the door so both are surprised. Looking at the notice on the blackboard about the Christmas party, Pin says that they are going karaoke for the party but sorry, he can’t sing. Ayane tells him that no one is inviting him to go. Pin starts shouting if she knows that day that is. Ayane says that it is Christmas. Pin shouts that he doesn’t have time to be with them brats, for he will go out with a beautiful nurse. Ayane is surprised when Pin asks her if she is going to the class party. To her irritation, Pin laughs when she said ah. Pin tells her that she must have felt lonely which she denies for she didn’t even say if she is going or not. To Ayane’s surprise, Pin suggests that she go with a person like Kent. Just when Ayane asks why, Kent tells Pin to let Ayane be because right now, he[Kent] is very serious. Putting his arm around Kent, Pin asks if they are currently at a ‘tie breaker’. Kent tells him to quit joking around. Ayane starts to shout that the two are a hindrance, get out of the way for she wants to go out the room. Then, Pin asks her why she is too hot-tempered. Ayane just shouts that they are awful and can just go to hell. Kent suddenly sits on the floor and laments about going to the same place as Pin..which is hell. Pin just giggle that he’ll view it as an honor. At the girls’ toilet, Ayane is putting on her lipstick and asks what Kent meant by ‘very serious’, serious about what, it must be idle talk. Then, she remembers what Kent said before that it isn’t like that about being a good guy. [/something like he isn’t doing this things for her because he is a good guy]
Just as Ayane came out of the toilet, Kent calls out to her and asks her what she plans for Christmas. Looking a bit uncomfortable, Ayane says that she doesn’t have any plans and she doesn’t have a boyfriend though she will go to the class party together with Sawako and Chizuru. She asks, “What about you?” Kent says, “Let’s spend Christmas together. The two of us. *blush a bit* ..With only the two of us?” Ayane looks at him in surprise. She somewhat backs away and becomes totally speechless. Then, Kent’s fangirls came and ask Kent about spending Christmas together at some other place, and Ayane can come with them for it will be truly fun. To Kent’s surprise, Ayane says that she won’t go, she’ll go with the class party. Before leaving, she tells Kent to have fun. While she walks away, Kent remembers crying Ayane [during the school trip]. He mutters that Ayane still doesn’t want to open up. Just when fangirls start to talk again what they will do on Christmas, Kent tells them that he won’t be going with them for this year, he is going to join his class’ party. The fangirls lament over this. Then, Chizuru and Sawako are startled when Ryu asks Chizuru if she is going to the Christmas party, for he is going. Chizuru exclaims that she is going, and it isn’t like she’ll skip it because of him. Then, Ryu covers his face in embarrassment[/laughing] as he says that he isn’t asking about that. This made Chizuru also blush. Ryu says okay, they will both go. After Ryu leaves, blushing Sawako looks at blushing Chizuru. Then, Chizuru starts freaking out over it. Sawako can only say that she likes other people’s love stories. Chizuru exclaims that this isn’t a love story, and compared to others, she should think first of herself. She mentions to Sawako that something is troubling Shouta. It is something like he doesn’t want her to say though there is really no rule about it. She points out to Sawako to look at Shouta there, who is spacing out, and snubbing hyper Soichi. Then, Sawako starts to realize that there is some truth to it for Shouta does seem to space out and would always look somewhere else while talking.
Soon, they go shopping for Christmas gifts. Ayane bought a small bag of rock salt to shock people. =P and Chizuru tells her to give that no enemies. [Note: Salt is usually thrown to drive away evil spirits in Japan] While holding some shower gel, Sawako calls herself stupid for those times when Shouta is doing that, it isn’t because they have a ‘falling out’. Ayane asks if Sawako is giving that for Shouta. Sawako says that she had already prepared something else. While Chizuru is sadly looking at some sock/wristband [probably for Ryu], Ayane tells Sawako that Shouta could be thinking about spending Christmas with only the two of them or with the class, just like Andou and Yui who would spend it together but will drop by the party. At home, Sawako had finished the gloves that she will give for Shouta. She wears it on and wonders if it is okay. She starts to wonder what is troubling Shouta and too bad Chizuru doesn’t know the concrete details. She starts to wonder if it okay for her to just ask him about it, and she wants to help him with it. The next day[?], after school dismissal, Sawako calls out to Shouta to follow her where there are few people around. Then, near the ‘no entry’ sign by the stairs, Sawako struggles to say something. Then, she blushes and looks up to him. Shouta suddenly looks away and looks a bit flustered. Facing down, Shouta sits down the stairs and asks what it is. He is surprised when she says that there is something that she wants to say. He looks up to her and sees her sitting near him. Looking straight at him, she touches his arm and asks him if there is something troubling him. Then, to her surprise, Shouta holds her hand and got them off him. With a kind sad smile, Shouta says that there is none. Then, Shouta turns to stand up. Embarrassed, Sawako says is that so. Then, she thinks that she is just thinking too much.
Scans by 君届同好会.

Stardust★Wink [Chapter 38]

2012-02-13T18:39:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 10, 2012

Cover Page: “A girl in love always has a heart that beats endlessly♥” Perspiring in the heat, Anna uses her hand to shield her face from the sun. She says, “Hey.. Didn’t you say that it is a 5 minute walk and we’ll be able to reach Hinata’s school? I feel like we are already walking for 10 minutes..” Perspiring Sou looks at his cellphone and says, “Wait, in the end, that road a while ago, should we have turned right there? Nope, but just looking at the map, it says that the correct way is to go straight..” Looking aghast, Anna says, “So, didn’t I say that we should have gone to the right..” Sou angrily shouts, “Ha?! You fundamentally didn’t even say it, okay!!” Pointing at Sou, Anna shouts that he is the one in the wrong because he didn’t listen. Sou answers back, “Who would listen to the words of someone who can’t even read a map!! Anyway, you are also just basing it on your feeling to say which one is right!!” Soon, the two are bickering in the streets. Narration: “Hello everyone. I’m Koshiro Anna. In this scorching hot summer, we are currently lost in Tokyo.” Pulling his shirt’s collar a bit, Sou says that in the end, they shouldn’t have depended on vigor and run to an unfamiliar place.. “When obviously right now isn’t the time to get lost. And also, it is even hot, to death..” Aghast Anna exclaims that is right for Hinata going to be expelled. “And while we were lost, what if the worst case scenario happens, what are we to do!!” Sou asks her what she meant by worst case scenario. Anna tensely says that Hinata will go on some abandoned traveling all by himself. There is a chibi Hinata walking away with a huge backpack, and he left a note, ‘Please don’t come and look for me. Hinata’. Sou exclaims why. Anna exclaims that it is because Hinata didn’t have any messages for three days already. “He must have felt quite depressed!! And, Hinata.. *Anna remembers Hinata telling her and Mari before, that even if before he doesn’t always quite like school, but right now, he finds high school to be really fun.* Did he really quit school.. Because it is too sudden that I totally couldn’t believe it. Could it be that Mashiro just had some misunderstanding..?” Sou tells her that is why they came there today to confirm it. Sou sighs and says that quitting school thing is only Mashiro’s practical joke, and about Hinata not writing a message back, that is because he got fed up by that message Anna sent. Aghast, Anna tells him to quit talking about that message. While grabbing Anna’s bag, Sou says okay, quickly just let him see that message. Anna screams in shock and shouts for him let it go, pervert. “And speaking of that, I wasn’t the one who thought of it, it is Nanoka!” Sou says, “Ya, ya, I know.”

While Anna is protesting, there is suddenly a flash of light. Holding her bag, Anna freezes with Sou who is trying to grab the bag back. A short haired girl says, “Ah-- people passed through. *She is trying to take a picture of a cat behind the two.* Ah, forget it. This is also okay.” Anna apologizes for interrupting her. The girl says that it is okay, and she ought to apologize because she fundamentally wants to take a picture of that cat. [<- she took their picture so she is apologizing] While Anna thinks that it is a SLR camera, Sou asks her if she knows Touto* Arts High School which is nearby that place. [*guesswork name from 東都] The girl asks if they are going to check out the place upon enrollment. “If that is so, then I’ll accompany you there. Anyway, I’m also a student from that school.” Sou says is that so. “Thank you very much.” While the girl is leading the way, Anna looks surprised. She thinks, “That uniform, and carrying an SLR camera. Taking pictures of the surround area of the school. And, she is also a student of the school where Hinata goes to. This person, could it be that she..” Soon, the girl says that they are finally here at Touto Arts.. Anna interrupts her and asks if she is a part of the photography club. The puzzled girl says yes, and she [Anna] is quite sure of it. Thinking that she is right with her guess, Anna asks, “Is there a Tokura Hinata in your club?! Can I ask if you know!? These past few days, did something strange happen to Hinata!? Something like..qqqqqquuuiiitttiinnng school..type..” Sou comments that she stutters too much. The girl asks if they are Hinata’s friends from his hometown. “And, it is because of this that you guys came to Tokyo?” Sou/Anna says yes, for they weren’t able to contact him so.. The girl says, “It’s truly amazing- Tokura is truly loved.” Anna and Sou are speechless over this ‘love’ comment. Then, the girl says, “It seems that quitting school has already been decided.” Sou and Anna are surprised for it was true. Sou asks why. Then, he exclaims that he totally doesn’t understand what that meant, why did things turn out that way. Just when the girl is about to explain, someone says, “Sou? Ah, Anna is also here.” The three look at the side to see that it is Hinata. Hinata says that he heard familiar voice/s. “It is quite a shock. Why are you guys here? And, why are you together with Yuki*-senpai.?” [*guesswork name from 由季] While Yuki is explaining that these kids seems to be lost and she walked together with them to.., Hinata is surprised when Sou and Anna suddenly shouts, “Hinata!!”
Anna exclaims that it is really great that Hinata had thoroughly think things through. Hinata asks think of what. Anna kept on saying that it is really great. Sou shouts at Hinata as to how come he doesn’t answer his cellphone. Hinata asks if he called him up. Sou shouts that he has called him a lot of times. “You better not tell me stuff like you had left your cellphone at home!?” Hinata says, how he can say it, it seems to have ran out of batteries since he is in helter-skelter [/chaotic and disorderly haste]. Sou is angry and aghast over that. Sou asks him what is the meaning of that quitting school and what had happened. Hinata looks surprised and realizes that they came because of that. With folded arms, Hinata says, “Is that so.. Where do I start explaining it?” Sou angrily asks, Ha. Yuki holds up pictures of Hinata with Mari, and says, “It is this. These photos has been spread around the school that people are calling it ‘teacher and student scandal’. And because of it, it stirred up a huge disturbance.” Hinata says that is right. Looking at the pictures, Sou mutters that he couldn’t believe it. He shouts what’s with these pictures and no matter how he looked at it, someone maliciously wants to cause trouble. “Before dealing with Hinata, they should first look for the people who took these pictures!!” Hinata tries to tell him that his voice is too loud. Anna is also shock over the pictures. She thinks that based on the clothes that Hinata and Mari are wearing and the background of the photos, the ones who took the pictures are.. Then, they hear a girl shouting, “I’ve said that it really hurts, Mona*. Don’t pull me!!” [*guesswork name from 萌奈] They look at the side to see the two senpai-s, who were with Hinata in the Photo Koshien. Mona, the long haired girl, has been pulling the arm of the short haired girl. Mona says that she heard that Hinata will be coming to school today, and today could be their last opportunity. Trying to free herself, the short haired girl shouts that she told her that she doesn’t intend to apologize. Mona exclaims that fundamentally, their intention is Kobayashi-sensei so they hatched up that plan. “But, it caused Tokura-kun to quit school-something when it has nothing to do with him..” The other girl exclaims, “Yes, it does!! If Tokura isn’t like a fool who would listen whatever that woman says, then things won’t turn out this way! The one who made that woman grow[/mature?] is also that guy!!” [<- I don’t understand the grow thing but maybe, made Mari overconfident.]
While Anna and Sou are surprised by what they are saying, Mona calls out to Shuri* in disbelief over what she is saying. [*guesswork name from 珠里] Shuri starts to say that it is because of that woman, Yuki she.. Then, she and Mona notice that Hinata and everyone else are watching and listening to them. They mutter that it is Yuki and Tokura. Yuki says so, they were the ones who did it, and what they did is over the top. “Didn’t I say that it is already alright that I wasn’t able to go to the Photo Koshien? Even if I’m very happy over your [two] feelings, but this kind of thing..” Shuri exclaims that they didn’t do it for her. “It is because I’ve lost my temper. That woman suddenly became an adviser and then changed the members at will. *Mari had put Hinata in the group for the Photo Koshien and took out Yuki.* She didn’t even know that the three of us would always work together as a group!! We fundamentally wanted to absolutely get the first prize this year. When this year is obviously the last year.. *pause* Anyway, I won’t apologize.” Shuri turns around and left. Mona quickly bows and apologizes to Hinata. She also apologizes Shuri’s part..even if an apology won’t resolve this issue. Turning to Hinata, Yuki says that even if Shuri isn’t fundamentally a bad person but she couldn’t see it as totally right. Hinata didn’t reply. Yuki continues to say, “In the meantime, I think that I’m also responsible so I’ll go talk with the teachers.” Hinata says, “But..” Flashback: A couple of male teachers told Hinata that as a scholar, he ought to have an impeccable clean and upright record. The school chairman doesn’t want to let a student, who had brought shame, to stay in the school. And, the other party is Kobayashi-sensei, the daughter of the school chairman. “How pitiful..” End flashback. Hinata says, “It’s already enough.. And just like what that senpai said, I think I was also at fault. *slight bow to two senpai-s* Sorry, today I have to go to the classroom to get my things so I’ll be going ahead.” The senpai-s didn’t say anything and Anna’s head is slightly bowed.
In the empty classroom, while putting his things in the bag, Hinata asks Sou if they are going to go back today or are they going to stay for the night at Mashiro’s place. “I still have to prepare things as I move out so, I have no way of quickly going back, and that’s it..” While Anna just stands beside him, Sou calls out to ask what was that a while ago. Puzzled Hinata looks at him and asks, huh.. Sou shouts, “What do you mean that you are also at fault. You didn’t do anything wrong!! Why don’t you get a bit angry!! Just now that girl with a vicious look said something like you’ll listen to whatever that teacher said, why didn’t you refute it? It is that teacher who kept on wrapping herself up around you, okay! It’s because you’re too nice that you got yourself in neutral gear[/in this predicament]!! Why is it that you have to be expelled!!” Hinata looks surprised by Sou’s outburst. Raring to go, Sou shouts, “Beat them up badly!! First, I’m going to beat up that girl with a vicious look. And then, I’m going to beat up that infuriating sensei!! Then, that school chairman will be up next!!” Aghast Hinata grabs Sou’s shirt and exclaims what he is saying for if he really did that, it will cause even more trouble. “I beg you to stop.” Anna says that she also wants to beat them all up. Tense Hinata says, “Wait, even you, Anna, is saying that..” Anna is already crying. She says, “I want to use my fists and viciously hit them.. This is too mean.. *the two boys look at her* It wasn’t easy for Hinata to strive his best to get qualified and get in this school.. and.. and for Hinata who always do not have friends and don’t like school, to say that school is very fun--!! Waaaahh” Surprised, Sou shouts to Anna, “Ah, stupid, don’t say that Hinata doesn’t have friends!! Even if his friends are very few, but it shouldn’t be none. *turns to Hinata* Right?!” Aghast Hinata just quietly smiles and says, uh.. Holding out a pack of tissues to Anna, Hinata tells her that she cried excessively, so here are some tissues. Anna blows her nose and asks, why. Hinata is puzzled. Teary-eyed Anna asks, “Why do you seem quite calm, Hinata?” After looking surprised, Hinata smiles and asks if Yuki-senpai also seemed to be quite calm. Puzzled, Anna says that is true, it seems so.
Hinata says, “Compared to those other senpai-s, she is more calm and collected... I and Yuki-senpai are generally alike. Even if in one’s heart, it is like a thick swamp of rumbling darkness, no matter where one turns, I also do not know how to express out these feelings but I also couldn’t just always stare and not move at all. But there are people, who exists, who would get angry and cry over my matters, I always think that this felt much better..” Sou sighs and says that he still thinks Hinata is too easygoing. Hinata asks is that so, but then if it is drawing, whatever it is, he can draw it. Sou sweatdrops and asks if that is the issue. Hinata smiles and says, “Anna, Sou, thank you for coming.” Soon, it is sunset. While the three head out of the school, Anna exclaims that Sou has work today, and will he be able to reach it on time? Sou says that it would be good if he hurries then he would pretty much be able to catch up and arrive in time- kind of type.. Hinata says that in short, it is wishful thinking. Anna asks how come he never mentioned it. Then, Anna is surprised when someone shouts, “Tokura-kun!!” It is Mari. Somewhat flustered, Mari says, “About that.. I didn’t think that things will turn out like this.. *cries* I’m sorry..” Hinata says that he heard that Mari had also resigned. Mari says that it isn’t good that only she gets to stay in the school. “But compared to me, afterwards, what will happen to you, Tokura-kun..” Picking his ear, Sou says, “No need to worry, sensei-- Hinata will quickly totally forget about the stuff regarding you, and happily live on afterwards. How can I say this, he currently has this cute girlfriend that he is so happy to the extreme. *the two are surprised by what he said* And, when he returns back to his home’s apartment, I’m also there. *twinkle in the eye* The one whom Hinata has the best [/closest] relationship with.” Mari says that it is this kind of thing again. “A year ago in summer, Nagase-kun and Koshiro-chan had also chase after Tokura-kun and came to Tokyo. Throughout life, the relationship between the three of you won’t change.” The three look surprised. Then, the three best of childhood friends smile back in agreement.
Scans by all★wink汉化组.

Reimei no Arcana [Chapter 37]

2012-02-13T18:37:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 9, 2012

At a meeting room, Azhar tells everyone that tonight, they are leaving the royal capital. “A ship will be prepared and temporarily, we will first leave the country.” Ahkil notices that Nakaba looks totally depressed and disturbed that he approached her and asks what the matter is. Clenching her dress, Nakaba says that there is something that she wants to say. Soon, it is night. Nakaba and the others are already travelling in the desert with their camels. Someone says that after passing through this road, they will be staying in that town for the night to rest. Loki offers to go ahead to scout out the situation. Nakaba calls out to him. He stops and asks Nakaba if she is alright for she looks pale. Nakaba wonders if she ought to ask Loki to protect those two since this kind of future is going to happen. “But then, what if the consequence is Loki was the one who got hurt? *Loki tells her that he will quickly come back* What if by chance, Loki got killed? *remembers Cain’s death* What if that is the so-called ‘price’..?” Azhar quietly looks at troubled Nakaba. In the town, Loki has returned to inform them that nearby, there is nothing peculiarly strange. Azhar says that he had already booked them in this inn in advance so they should go there first.. While on the way to the inn, Nakaba starts to recognize the street where they are going. She becomes more scared for it is the same one in the dream. Nakaba immediately suggests that they keep on travelling ahead, a bit. She tells them that it is dangerous if they are found out, and how about they sleep outdoors. Ahkil informs her that the desert is more dangerous at night, so on the contrary, it is a worse option for them. Nakaba looks aghast for this is the road where either of the two princes will get killed. As Azhar tells her that they should move on, Nakaba thinks, “No. I don’t want to... Help me..! Who’ll come and help me!”

At the ship’s deck, Caesar is looking out the sea. Emilia joins him and asks him what the matter is. He says it is nothing but she tells him that he definitely ought to be worried about Nakaba and the others. Caesar didn’t reply. Emilia corrects herself and says that rather than worried about ‘Nakaba and others’, he is only worried about Nakaba. Caesar didn’t react for Emilia is right on the mark. Emilia thinks that Nakaba is always bearing something on her back, and generally, it is because of those stained red pupils, the cause is the Arcana. Caesar worriedly mutters Nakaba’s name. Back in the town, while everyone is walking forward, Loki notices that Nakaba is trembling. He suddenly grabs Nakaba’s shoulder and tells the others that he heard a lot of footsteps, coming from many armed men whom he thinks are soldiers. This made Nakaba become tenser than she already was. Ahkil tells his brother that it is Baatar’s private soldiers. Azhar says that the soldiers chasing after them have already chased them up to there. Ahkil urges Azhar to quickly depart from this place. Loki tells them that the sounds of the footsteps are coming from there so, they should go this way. While Loki is ushering her, Nakaba suddenly sees/remembers the two doors she saw in the dream. One is when Ahkil went to save Azhar and he ended up killed. The other is she grabbed Ahkil’s arm and Azhar gets killed. Nakaba wonders if there are really only two futures. “How about other roads? Other futures?” Then, a soldier shouts, “There, chase after them!!” Nakaba is startled by that. She sees soldiers in front of them. Pointing to some rocky place, Nakaba shouts for Ahkil to go hide those boulders. Azhar says that their goal is him so he is going to use himself as bait so they should go ahead. Flustered Nakaba thinks no, no, that way.. Ahkil shouts for his brother. Nakaba continues to look tense for it is like what the Arcana had shown her. Reaching out to Ahkil’s arm, Nakaba thinks that she only has to grab his arm and Prince Azhar will die. Nakaba hesitates and thinks that if she doesn’t grab Ahkil’s arm, Ahkil will die.
Perspiring and crying, Nakaba grabs Ahkil’s arm. Azahar looks back and says that this way is very good. Then, he gets slain by the soldiers. Ahkil shouts for his brother and tries to go to him but Nakaba grabs his arm tight and tries to pull him away. While Ahkil tries to call out for Nakaba to let him go, Loki hits the back of Ahkil’s neck and made him unconscious. A bit tense, Loki calls out to Nakaba. Looking totally awful, Nakaba can only say to quickly [get] Ahkil [away]. Loki carries Ahkil on his shoulder and starts to run off with Nakaba. The soldiers shout that the Fifth prince is escaping, they have to chase after them. Flashback: At the meeting room, Nakaba told the princes that she has something to say. She asked if Ahkil can go out for a while. Puzzled, Ahkil did as told. After Ahkil left, Azhar asked Nakaba what it is. Looking aghast, Nakaba admitted to him that she has seen the future. “It is either you’ll die or Ahkil will die. There is only either of the two futures. If one chose one side, the other one will die.. I.. I will definitely choose to save Ahkil. So.. so..” To her surprise, sadly smiling Azhar told her that that way is very good. “I have lost to Baatar. Every since before, I have not lost[/risk] my life. Every since from the start, what intimidates Baatar isn’t me, but rather, it is Ahkil’s ability and wisdom. In the future.. the person who will become your strength isn’t me but, it is Ahkil.” Nakaba is aghast-surprise by what Azhar said. He told her, “I’ll leave.. Ahkil to you.” Nakaba felt like crying. End flashback. While running, Nakaba thinks, “I definitely will save Ahkil so I only can ask for your forgiveness, and also, I can only pray, pray that confessing it beforehand, I will be able to excuse from any wrongdoing. This kind of ending. How can it be very good? I have unexpectedly placed lives in the balance and choose by weighting them out. For [my] goal, I had exploited a life. *Remembers Baatar hold Irasifu’s head* What’s the difference between me and that man?” As they run, tears are falling from Nakaba’s eyes. While Azhar lies dead on the ground, Nakaba just kept on saying, “..sor..ry.. Sor..ry.. Sorry..”
Scans by Rei'S工作室.

Sugar*Soldier [Chapters 4-7]

2012-02-13T18:35:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 8, 2012

[Free Talk: I’ve skipped chapter 3 since it is already out in English scanlation.]

During the field trip, Iriya is showing his charming self which made Makoto and others fall for him more. Makoto couldn’t chop veggies and of course, Shiroyuki is amazing at it. [By the way, Shiroyuki literally means Snow White =P] Then, Iriya even made a special request from Makoto = not to give him carrots. When Makoto gushes that he is cute because of that, he flicks her forehead and says that she is cuter than him. While washing the dishes, Shiroyuki warns her of ‘falling in the trap’. When Makoto is asking if she meant Iriya, Shiroyuki decides to show her what she meant. They spy on a girl with her friend confessing to Iriya. Iriya admits that he always doesn’t have a girlfriend and up to now, he doesn’t plan on wanting to go steady. The girls are persistent about it being better to have a girlfriend. Iriya apologizes and says that he hates it when others decide things for him. He thanks them for their feelings and apologizes for not returning them. Shiroyuki tells Makoto that Iriya is like that ever since their junior high. Soon, everyone else is gathered around, and it is starting to rain. Makoto realizes that she left her cellphone at the sink so she went to get it. Iriya tries to help her about it but Makoto couldn’t face him and runs off. Then, after retrieving her cellphone, she looks at her and Iriya’s picture on the cellphone. She is relieved that no one saw that. She thinks that she can still turn back from really falling for him. She plans to delete the picture when there is a loud thunder which frightens her. Then, the prince has arrived to help her. Iriya towels her dry and tells her that he came because she looks as if she is afraid of thunder. She wonders why he is being kind to her, and why he doesn’t want a girlfriend. She fears that she is going to bite the prince’s apple and there will be no turning back.

She wants to confess but fears a lot of things. She got scared over the thunder again. Iriya covers her ears with the towel so that she won’t hear the thunder. Then, she starts raving about the great and cute things about Iriya. She cries that she can’t help but fall for him. On cue, she faints and it turns out that she is already feverish. Iriya starts to carry her on his back and notices her cellphone on the floor. He sees their picture together, and Makoto mutters his name. He says that he doesn’t want to stain[/dirty] her like this. Then, together with Ameki, Iriya brought Makoto to her house. They meet Erika at the door and mention that Makoto had a fever. Looking at Iriya, Erika asks if he is Makoto’s boyfriend. Iriya says that he isn’t. Ameki apologies but she has to leave for club activity. Since Makoto won’t wake up, Iriya will be putting her in her room. After doing that, Iriya prepares to leave when Erika stops him by saying that his clothes are wet. She offers to dry them or else, he’ll catch a cold. Then, she offers him some tea. The next day, Makoto is worried over whatever rude thing she must have done to Iriya. Unfortunately, she totally forgot about it. She apologizes to Iriya and asks if she said anything strange. Iriya says there is, then passes it as a joke. To Makoto’s relief, Iriya says that she didn’t. She doesn’t want to end the conversation that way so she asks him how she can thank him. Iriya suggests that she treat him to ice cream tomorrow for he is busy today. On the way home, Makoto decides to walk around the station to survey the area for tomorrow. To her surprise, she sees Iriya, waiting for someone. And when that person arrives, it turns out to be her sister, Erika.
Makoto decides to stalk them. Sitting at the other table of a cafe, she watches them as they have a snack. Makoto is shock that her sister is already calling him, Shun-kun. Erika is interviewing Makoto if he is afraid of high places [he isn’t] and if he likes sweets [he says as long as it’s not sweet veggies like carrot cake]. Makoto is disappointed for she thought that carrot thing is a secret between the two of them. Then, Erika asks if she can feed him with her dessert. Iriya obliges. Makoto is freaking out. Then, she overhears a couple of girls talking about Iriya and Erika being a match. It made her think that they are like prince and princess. Makoto decides that she has seen enough so she left. Erika has seen her but Iriya didn’t. At home, Makoto has already taken a bath when Erika returns home. Erika tells Makoto that she is with Iriya today. She also tells Makoto that he is handsome and her type. She asks Makoto if she isn’t going to ask why they met. Makoto just says that it has nothing to do with her. To Makoto’s shock, Erika tells her that they will also meet up tomorrow, but then, it has nothing to do with her. Then, Makoto starts to have another bout of inferiority complex..wondering why she isn’t her sister. At school, Makoto is horrified when Shiroyuki points out to her that she is wearing her coat inside out. When she tries to remove it quickly, the button fell off. Shiroyuki helps her sew it back on. Makoto asks her if Iriya would give that apple to someone who is beautiful and cute, and had confessed to him. Shiroyuki asks if she is giving up. She says that isn’t it to rude to the person who will like her in the future if she keeps referring to herself as ‘this kind of person’. Makoto remembers the guy who liked her before in junior high. Shiroyuki tells her that she didn’t tell her to give up, but rather she told her the truth. And, if she truly likes him, she must fight for it. Makoto asks how she can fight when there is no way she can win. Shiroyuki corrects her that what she is fighting is her heart that will soon surrender. Teary-eyed Makoto is touched by what she said and asks if this is also how Shiroyuki fight for the kingdom. Shiroyuki says yes. Makoto realizes that she has always been giving up because that is her best way in avoiding to get hurt.
After school dismissal, to Makoto’s surprise, Iriya says that he’ll wait for her at the school gate. Later on, Iriya is happily eating his ice cream. Makoto laments that she didn’t fix her hair because she thought that there is no hope for her to be with him today. She wonders if she ought to ask if he is going out with her sister. On cue, Iriya’s phone rings. Just when Iriya bids her goodbye, Makoto grabs his shirt and tells him not to leave. While Makoto is telling him that she heard about him meeting with her sister, Makoto had a flashback of someone calling out ‘do not leave’. That someone seems to be lying on the floor and looking up the door. He snaps out of it when Makoto calls out his name again. To Makoto’s surprise, Iriya says that he won’t go, and he thought that it would be better not to go. While Makoto is freaking out if that is okay, Iriya starts to write a message on his cellphone. Then, Erika arrives. Just when Iriya is going to apologize to her that he isn’t going, Makoto is motioning for him that it is okay to go. ^^; After watching them, Erika holds on to Iriya’s arm and tells Makoto to join them. Iriya has no objections. Makoto couldn’t believe that she will tag along during their date. It is already her limit to tell him ‘don’t go’. Then, when Makoto is about to decline, Erika puts all of her shopping bags to Makoto for her to carry them. Erika points to a car that is waiting and says that they are going. Makoto is shock that Erika brought them to a photo shoot. While the staff are looking over Iriya, Erika tells her that they want to do a date project but there is few new faces playing the boyfriend so when she saw Iriya, she thought ‘he is it!’. She had asked Iriya about it and he agreed. She kept it a secret because she wants to give Makoto a pleasant surprise. Makoto asks about going steady with Iriya. To Makoto’s shock again, Erika says that anyone who doesn’t have a car is out of the selection process. Soon, Makoto felt like melting into a puddle.
A female staff gives Makoto a drink and starts to talk about Iriya being popular. She laments that Iriya only agreed to do it once for he isn’t interested with showbiz/modeling. She is confident that the magazine will be popular if it comes out. Makoto thinks that even if it is a misunderstanding, it might come true if she kept on not doing anything. She uneasily wonders if she ought to confess. She remembers Iriya agreeing not to leave because he said so..so maybe there is a chance. After the photo shoot, the editor suggests to Makoto that she takes a picture with Iriya as if they are lovers. She tries to decline and says that Iriya won’t want to. Iriya says that he doesn’t object to it. The woman tells her that it won’t be published..just one picture. When Makoto keeps on declining, Erika scolds her about this chance is given to her and don’t tell her that she [Makoto] totally doesn’t want to. Makoto says that it is because she has no make-up and doesn’t look good (from crying yesterday). Erika says that is no problem for they have a make-up artist and there’s no problem with her basic face. A note says that Erika is encouraging her. Soon, after a little make-up, Erika pushes Makoto out to Iriya. Makoto is totally stiff. They tell her to act like lovers. Iriya holds her shoulder and says something. Soon, they held hands. Then, they had their picture taken by with the sunset and bridge as backdrop. Looking at the picture from the camera, Makoto is amazed by it. Erika nudges Makoto’s head and tells her to go ahead for she has to go to the editorial division first. She flicks Makoto’s forehead and says that they look like lovers. Erika also says that Makoto looks really worried but relax, for she won’t steal the person her cute younger sister is interested in..but then, Shun-kun has.. They were interrupted by a staff member calling for Erika that they should leave. Iriya tells Makoto that they should go home. She thanks him for today. While Iriya walks ahead, Makoto remembers Iriya telling her a while ago during the photo shoot to treat him as her boyfriend, only for now. Makoto thinks that even if that lover photo is fake but she believes that for a day, it had become real. Even if for a moment, her imagination allows it.
Scans by all★wink汉化组 and 離境漢化組.

Kyou no Kira-kun [Chapter 4]

2012-02-13T18:33:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 7, 2012

Page 4 – U&I. Cover Page: “The Kira-kun that I know is a bit arrogant and also a bit of a romanticist[/sentimental]. It is a fact though that he is a crybaby. And also, it seems that he is currently in love.” Narration: “September 26th – Today is not the same as the usual.” Nino looks at her cellphone where there is an email from Kira. Kira wrote that he has something to do today so he might not be able to go to school. Nino thinks that it is the first time that someone emailed her, aside from her family. “What could be that something be? Mama also made his bento[/lunch], together with mine..” Then, her thoughts are interrupted by some laughter from her classmates. A guy is telling a girl to lend him the notes to copy since it is generally correct, and the girl tells him that after class, she’ll let him see it a bit. Nino looks sad and thinks that if it is the usual times, Kira would help her study. Flashback: Pointing to her notes, Kira told her that the answer is X=5. Nino is surprised and thought that Kira is unexpectedly very intelligent. End flashback. While the others are busy talking with their friends, Nino just quietly sits by herself, all alone. She thinks that she should go do some knitting. Narration: “Today, Kira-kun is not around [/beside me].” During lunch break, Nino asks Sensei where he thinks Kira went. After eating himself full, Sensei tells her not to worry because before, that guy has been skipping class. “But this time around, he ought to be acting like an ‘infatuated guy’. *Nino puzzled* According to my prediction, *smiles* that guy ought to have went to see the person that he likes. Nino, can you rub my shoulders a bit.” Nino looks at him in surprise. Then, she continues to eat and says, ah, is that so, maybe it is that. Flying, Sensei seems to shout about wanting to fool around with Kira. Nino thinks, “‘Someone he likes’..huh..”

After school dismissal, Nino is taking her shoes from the shoe lockers. She thinks that it is rare for her to be all by herself so she plans to go to a nearby store by the train station to buy some knitting materials. Suddenly, someone closes her shoe locker and says, “Hey, Bird Girl, I got something to tell you.” Nino looks surprised for it is Yabe, the shit guy, again. She asks him what’s up. Yabe asks her what airplane is Kira on today. “I thought that he is resting[/absent] today but just now, I saw him coming out from the office and then, coming back.” There is a scene of Yabe standing at the corner when he saw Kira coming out of the school office. Nino asks Yabe if Kira came. Irked Yabe asks if she didn’t know. Nino wonders why she has to know that. Yabe says, “Forget it, compared to that. *blushes and scratches head* Lately, did Kira mention something about me?” With a blank expression, Nino says that if it is about shit guy, none, totally nothing. Embarrassed, Yabe shouts that she isn’t allowed to call him that. Puzzled, Nino asks could it be that he wants to patch things up with Kira. Embarrassed and tense, Yabe [imaginarily] picks up little Nino and exclaims, “Ha!? Are you joking? It is totally the opposite. I only wanted to extend a helping hand to him. Stu-pid” Nino didn’t believe him and thinks that she is right. Looking serious, Yabe says that anyway, he fundamentally doesn’t understand why Kira wants to stay away from them. Surprised, Nino says that she also doesn’t know. Yabe tells Nino that she is quite useless. “Then, in the end, it is still because of THAT WOMAN. *Nino is surprised* Regarding this part, I’m also not quite sure so you go and investigate it for me.” Sweatdropping, Nino tells him to go investigate it on his own, and it just so happen that today Kira is going to meet with someone. Yabe exclaims, “What!? You should have said it earlier. Let’s go quickly. *grabs Nino’s hand* If we chase after him now, we might be able to ride on the same train [coach]. There is a possibility that he is going to see that woman. We’re going to follow him. *Nino is shock* I think that you seem to be very concerned so I’ll accompany you, and it is okay for us to go together. It can’t be helped that I have to hold your hand.”
Inside the train, Kira is listening to some music from his cellphone. Also inside, Nino and Yabe are breathing hard from running. Yabe says that they were barely able to reach it. Looking at the side, Yabe smiles and says that they were able to even catch up with Kira. He looks at Kira standing at the opposite door at the side. Nino tells him that she doesn’t want to do this kind of thing. While spying on Kira, Yabe asks, “Ha? Could it be that you aren’t curious about the woman that Kira likes?” This surprises Nino, and she slightly blushes. Sensei whispers to Nino that with a guy like that, it is okay for her to deal with him as she pleases [/go with the flow]. Yabe tells her to quickly look at that side of Kira. There are a couple of lovestruck girls who gush over how super handsome Kira is. Yabe says that for those pigs who are [love] obsessed with Kira, he is someone who is totally unparalleled. “Because Kira’s existence has already surpassed gods. That’s right, and the only one who can be together with him is me. *points to self with an arrogant look* You are only but trash.” Sweatdropping, Nino wonders what’s up with those flowers around him. Nino says that it seems that he really likes Kira, and unexpectedly, up to this degree. Irked Yabe tells her not to say such disgusting things. “I only know Kira more than anyone else does. The food he likes, books, music, I know everything. *drool with blushing crazed look* Also, he is actually [naturally] curly haired but he would firmly say that it is a perm. And every week, he would wear his kitty-pattern underwear once. Aside from that, there is also..” Nino looks aghast, and thinks that Yabe is annoying. Nino asks him as to why they are that close. Yabe looks serious. He says, “I cannot tell you about that. It is my precious memory.” Nino looks surprised about it. Then, Yabe exclaims that Kira unexpectedly talked with those pigs. The two girls are pleasantly surprised when Kira tells them to come to his side so that they can talk. The girls are more than happy to stand up to talk with him. While Yabe is furious as to why Kira did that, Nino notices a pregnant woman standing nearby. The pregnant woman notices that there is some vacant seat, so she goes to the seat where the two girls were sitting earlier. While sitting, she is relieved that she could sit. While the two girls are chatting at him, Kira glances at the pregnant woman and looks happy about it. Nino has noticed all of this and she is moved by what Kira did. Nino tells Yabe, “About that, if you truly know Kira-kun, then please, look carefully at the current Kira-kun.” After looking surprised, Yabe points at her and exclaims that she is a weirdo so don’t instruct him what to do for he is already exercising patience just being with her.
Then, at some park, Kira is listening to music while waiting. At the corner, Yabe says that in the end, no matter how he looks at it, Kira is waiting for a girl. “Then, later on, I’ll know the reason for the change in Kira. What kind of girl is she?” Nino just quietly looks on. She wonders what is going on for she suddenly feels nervous. Just when she is trying to say something to Yabe, Yabe looks surprised and says, “She’s here.” Surprised Nino looks up to see a very beautiful woman greeting Kira. As her heart is beating loudly, the woman takes off her sunglasses and hugs Kira. She happily says that she made him wait a long time♡ Nino still looks surprised [and a bit jealous]. Yabe says what’s up with that gorgeously dressed woman.. “Is it her? Ah, they are leaving. Let’s follow them.” While the woman tightly clings on Kira’s arm, they start to walk and the other two followed Kira. After Kira and the woman enter a building, the two stare up the signboard, and look shock. It is a kyabakura[/cabaret club] called Love. The signboard has pictures of beautiful bargirls. Nino couldn’t believe that Kira... Yabe also couldn’t believe it. Nino tensely says that there has to be some reason for it. Angrily kicking the wall, Yabe exclaims that Kira unexpectedly lose himself at a bar and fell for some red light district’s bar girl. “How could there be a reason. That’s so low. I had it. I’m going home.” Nino watches glum Yabe leaves. Sensei tells her that B class guy is quite troublesome. Suddenly kneeling down on the floor, Nino wonders if she ought to go home, too..and she couldn’t accept it a bit. Seeing her in that kneeling position, Sensei asks her what happened, is she going to poop. ^^; She is surprised when someone grabs her hands from behind. She looks up to see that it is Kira. Kira calls her stupid, for how could she just stay there and not leave. “If you’re not careful, some pervert might come and take you away.” While helping her to stand up, Nino exclaims in shock as to why. Kira asks her why she is following him [with Yabe] and he already discovered them earlier. Then, the woman comes from behind Kira and exclaims, “Gosh- If it isn’t the living Nino!!” Nino is surprise for it is that woman. Nino is puzzled when the woman exclaims that she finally gets to see Nino, and there is really a parrot on her shoulder. Kira tells Nino that he noticed them halfway on the trip, and because it is too embarrassing, he pretended not to know. “But, I’ve always wanted to introduce you, for you to know [her].” After looking puzzled, Nino realizes something. Nino somewhat laughs it off and says, is that so. “So, she’s your mother.” The woman giggles and says, “Too bad[,you’re wrong].” Sweatdropping, Kira points to the woman and says, “No, this person is my dad.” Blushing, the ‘woman’ winks and sticks out her tongue. She says, “Please call me Tiara ♡” Nino and Sensei are shock.
In denial and still thinking father.., Nino continues to laugh and says, “-ah, it’s your mother, right?” Kira tells her, “No, it’s true.” Then, a drunk man put his hand on Tiara’s shoulder, and says if this miss is a bar girl. “So, do you want to have fun together with me?” Tiara immediately slams him on the floor and pulls up the man’s leg from behind, while sitting on him. [I think that is a wrestling move, single leg boston crab] Tiara angrily shouts, “Huh? Miss? I’m a guy, you baldie!” The man screams that it hurts. While Nino is sweatdropping, Kira says, “See--?” Tiara shouts for the man to properly remember his face for he is the leader in this district. Nino asks if it is the kyabakura. Kira says that it isn’t the kyabakura. Pointing to the signboard at the side of the building, he tells her to look up. It isn’t that kyabakura, but Club Tiara above the kyabakura’s signboard. [<- I think Tiara’s club is just an ordinary bar in contrast to kyabakura where there are hostesses/bargirls serving drinks.] Kira tells her that today is a regular check-up day, and he came to see his father to tell him that everything is normal. “I’ve made you worry. I fundamentally wanted to explain it to you later on.” Nino says is that so but then, he went to school first. They were interrupted by Tiara who calls out to Nino. “Tiara wants to be all alone with Nino so that we can have a private word, just the two of us ♪ Yuuji, you’re such a hindrance. Go buy some flowers for the store.” While Nino looks surprised, Kira exclaims, “Ha!?” Nino wonders what Tiara wants to talk with her about. At a pedestrian overpass, Nino and Tiara are alone. Sensei has fallen asleep. Tiara says that he didn’t expect that there will be a day when he gets to talk with her like this. “I’m very happy. We are obviously neighbors but we’ve never seen each other.” Nino timidly asks if he felt boring to come and chat with her. To Nino’s shock, Tiara says that it certainly is for when he goes to her house, she would hide and would not come out, and even if right now, he doesn’t go there a lot. “But, you are the person who decided to stay together with Yuuji. Just with only that, it is something that quite appealing [for him]. *Nino looks surprised* Lately, Yuuji’s expression has also become gentle.” Nino tries to protest that it isn’t because of her. Bowing to Nino, Tiara says, “Nino, from today on, I beg you to please take care of[/keep an eye on] Yuuji more. That child is [this] uncle’s treasure.” This made Nino look flustered. As Tiara turn to leave, Nino realizes that this person is truly Kira-kun’s father.
Later on, Kira joins Nino at the pedestrian overpass. He asks her if his father said anything strange to her. Nino says that it is just some idle chat. Kira says that is good. He then comments that the parrot is sleeping. Nino notices this and wonders when Sensei did. Then, looking at the traffic, Nino says, “Kira-kun, I’ve discovered something important. The classroom is particularly noisy today. *Kira puzzled* That is one way of saying that it seems without Kira-kun around, I felt very lonely.” Kira looks surprised at somewhat flustered Nino. Nino felt strange and this is embarrassing. Kira holds out his hand and lifts Nino’s face up to his. He bends close that Nino looks surprised [because it seems as if he is going to kiss her]. Then, to her surprise, Kira lightly slaps her cheeks with both hands. He tells her, “If you easily say those kinds of words in front of guy, you will be kissed.” Nino looks surprised, and it seems Kira is also surprised. He looks away and says that it is already dark. “This is bad. What time is it? I still have things to do.” Nino says that it seems to be 7 o’ clock. Kira tells her to go home first. Nino says okay. Then, Nino quietly looks at the busy street below. Sensei has already awakened and asks if he has fallen asleep without knowing it. Nino says yes. Sensei asks what happened to her. “How come your face is so red?” Nino didn’t answer. At the clinic, Kira is kissing a woman. Then, he smiles at her. While the woman is lying on the bed, Kira looks down on her and smiles. He says, “I’ve come to see you, sensei.” Narration: “Actually, I also realize something. Hey, Kira-kun. Whenever I’m with you, my body temperature apparently goes up some degrees higher.”
Scans by 離境漢化組.

Bokutachi wa Shitte Shimatta [Chapter 56]

2012-02-13T18:31:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 6, 2012

The two Kaji-s look at the note on the door. Natsume had wrote that she is going out for a while so they go take their time. Blushing Kotori wonders if ‘go take your time’ is referring to.. Blushing Yukito thinks that Natsume did well *thumbs up* and she’s really such a good person. The two look at each other. Kotori felt that the mood is very subtle. Kotori nervously smiles and asks where Natsume could have gone, and she ought to quickly come back soon. Yukito didn’t answer. Just when Kotori turns to change her clothes, Yukito grabs her wrist. She turns to look at him. Somewhat blushing, Yukito asks her if she really thinks that Natsume would come back soon. He tells her that actually, he thinks that Natsume wants the two of them to stay there. “Don’t you think so, too?” This made Kotori blush and she says, “But, but..” Yukito asks, “..But?” Kotori couldn’t answer and just thinks that it is because she didn’t think that things would progress like this. Blushing Yukito looks at her, and then he suddenly hugs her really tight. Blushing Kotori calls out his name. He suddenly pushes her down on the floor. Kotori becomes nervous upon seeing Yukito looking so serious. Kotori couldn’t believe that this is for real. She pushes Yukito’s head sideways and starts shouting, “Cul..cultural festival.. cultural festival! After, after cultural festival-!” While Kotori’s eyes are closed and bracing for what will happen next, Yukito tells her that he knows. This made Kotori open her eyes and see Yukito leaning close to her face. Then, Yukito kisses her on the forehead. Sitting up, Yukito tells her that this is Natsume’s house so how could he do it at ease there. “And speaking of that, I’ve already promised you that it will be after the cultural festival..”

Kotori blushes and says that is right. She nervously laughs it off and says that is true, for doing it a friend’s house would make one always feel uneasy. Yukito also laughs it off and says that is true, it is ‘that Ibuki’s house. Looking away, Yukito sadly thinks that actually, it doesn’t bother him a bit and it seems that it is still ‘no good’. Blushing Kotori is touched that Yukito is still keeping his promise. Yukito teases Kotori that she is always saying cultural festival, cultural festival, and always being anxious, but she really thinks of doing it here. “How cunning! You very lewd girl.” Kotori exclaims that it isn’t so for he was the one who fell down on her. She pouts and looks away. She is quite relieved and thinks that this is very good for things didn’t turn very awkward. Then, Yukito freaks out upon seeing Kotori’s cleavage peeking out from her yukata. Kotori asks him why he is looking so stiff. Yukito thinks that in the end, he is expecting it. To Kotori’s surprise, Yukito had once again hugged her very tightly. While Kotori is asking what happened, Yukito’s thoughts are, “This is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad this is bad.” After Kotori calls out his name again, Yukito lets her go a bit and says that he still wants to hug like that for a while. Kotori says okay. Then, he says that he also wants to touch a little bit. While hugging her again, Kotori asks touch what. Then, she felt his hand on her chest. Kotori suddenly holds his hand and the two sheepishly look at each other. She nervously smiles and says, “About that..” Yukito keeps on smiling as if to tell her that he wants to touch. He mutters that it is just for a little bit. Kotori says no. Yukito asks why. Kotori says why..because.. Hooking her around his arm, Yukito asks again, why. Kotori exclaims that it is because her chest is very, very small and her underwear is also very strange.
Blushing Yukito exclaims that it isn’t small at all, and it is quite big. “I saw it! With my own eyes! More so, I don’t care about the underwear! Whatever it is, I can accept it!” Kotori exclaims what he is talking about, and why is he talking about her chest, so he did saw it, after all. Yukito tells her that he only saw it at a glance. Kotori says that since he already saw it, that is enough. Yukito tells her that seeing and touching are two different things. Kotori exclaims that he likes huge chest, and that’s very good, so there’s no need to touch hers. Flustered Yukito exclaims that he wants to touch, hers. He stops midway then, he looks at the side. After calming down a bit, Yukito tells her, “That.. didn’t I tell you before.. it is because, it’s you, so I wanted to do it with you, want to touch you..” Kotori says that is true. He looks at her and admits that he wants to wait for the cultural festival, but he has these thoughts of wanting to specially touch her. “Honestly speaking, I also have that kind of lewd thoughts.. *looks at her* Don’t you have it?” Yukito looks at her and Kotori seems to realize something. She admits to him that she does, frequently. Yukito says that it is because he likes her, that he wants to understand her more. Kotori also admits that even if it is her, she also has that.. She has thought of it numerous times - wanting to touch Yukito, wanting to hug him tight, and wanting to kiss him. They look at each other. Yukito reaches his hand to her and touches her chest. Kotori is shock when Yukito says that it’s quite firm. While Yukito looks at his hand, Kotori exclaims about it being firm, and then she says that it must be her bra. Yukito says is that so, then, one more time. Covering her chest, Kotori exclaims in disbelief that he wants to do it again. Then, Yukito holds her and touches her chest again. Kotori just looks stiff and nervously thinks that his hand is going straight for.. “Hand~~~~~~”
In her bedroom, Kotori jumps into the bed. She thinks that she felt quite tired and exhausted. “It’s the first time I’m being touched.. I’m a bit shock, a bit anxious, that I don’t know what’s going on.. but then, Yukito seems to be quite satisfied, this is okay, right?” Someone says that it is no good at all. She turns around to see human Kenken. He touches her face and says that she looks exhausted, does she want to eat a candy, and he has her favorite flavor. Just when Kotori is about to say something, he hush her by touching her nose and tells her that if she isn’t good at something, she shouldn’t force herself to accept it. “If you can’t do it, then you can’t do it, there’s no need to feel anxious about it.. Don’t think anymore about today, and properly rest up..” Kotori is touched by what he said, and she hugs him. She thinks that with only that, she is already this afraid.. “What about the other stuff.. Can I really do this!?” Back at school, Kotori busy herself in finishing up their horror cafe by fixing the curtains, painting the signboard, and making a small poster. Showing the poster to Abe, Kotori tells him that it is a menu poster to be placed outside. She asks him what he thinks of it. Abe approves of it and comments that it gives a ‘strange’ feeling. Abe says that it seems that she is giving all of her energy for today’s preparation. Laughing Kotori just says is that so, and it is because this is her first cultural festival since entering the school. Abe says that Kotori and Natsume are quite diligent that they would learn from them. Still with a smiling face, Kotori is surprised that Abe mentioned that she is ‘giving her all’ but rather, if she ease up a bit, she would start thinking of what happened yesterday. Then, Yukito enters and tells Abe to help carry the table. The two Kaji-s look at each other, and blush really red. Abe exclaims why their faces are that red. “Did something happen between the two of you?” Yukito quickly denies that something happened. Abe tells Yukito what’s going on, tell him. Pushing Abe away, blushing Yukito tells him that is enough, and quickly help, and don’t think of foolish things. Kotori looks a bit tense.
Then to her surprise, Yukito comes back. He tells her that they go walk around together during the cultural festival tomorrow. Kotori smiles and says yes. Yukito just blushes. Then, he quickly gives her a kiss on the cheek. While Kotori exclaims his name in surprise, Yukito says, see you later. Holding her blushing face, Kotori exclaims, “Ge..geez!” She thinks, “Everyone is still here..! I feel that Yukito is becoming more and more daring~~ *pause and looks slightly aghast* In any case, there is a way! In any case, there’s a way! In any case, there’s a way! In any case.. there’s a way..right?” And finally, it is the opening day of the cultural festival. Standing outside the gate, a guy asks, “Is this Kaji’s school--” By the way, in one of the signboards in the cultural festival, there is ‘Real Kiss’ drama that will be performed by the drama club. ‘Real Kiss’ is author’s series where Haruna and Mitsuki are leads. Hope they appear in the cultural festival ^^ Scans by 依蓮扫漫組.

The One [Chapter 86]

2012-02-06T11:45:00.001+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 4, 2012

After three months, cropped haired Feidna is now famous again. The fire goddess had taken back throne of being a Devereaux girl, after Lele dropped out. The media is abuzz with Feidna’s success with the help of Devereaux. At Leo’s apartment, Leo is shock that Lele is moving out from Eros’ place. He asks if it is necessary when they are already living together, and isn’t that good. Lele says that Eros is already feeling well so there is no need for her to take care of him. Lele also says that she misses Leo. Flustered Leo asks if she is concerned about his feelings. He admits that is right, when he just learned of it, he is like shock = ‘Heavens, my best friend and the guy I really love, together!!’ But then, there is a voice in his heart that said ‘do you want it to become like Leo X Eros, how can one look at that kind of scene. Leo tearfully curses and cries that kind of scene can’t be looked at. In his heart, he imagined all sorts of possible [BL and other] Eros’ scenarios but they ended up no good ever since Lele appeared. “So, you are my really liked, best friend. With you by his side, I can be at ease.” Holding hands, Leo tells her that if she wants to live together with Eros, he [Leo] will definitely be happy so there’s no need for her to have any apprehensions. Shaking her head, Lele says no, she actually would really want to stay by Eros’ side but he didn’t tell her to stay so.. Leo is shock that Eros didn’t say it. Aghast, Leo says that isn’t right, after getting along for some months, Eros obviously enjoys her company so there is no reason.. With a sad smile, Lele says that she thinks Eros has not totally opened up his heart to her. She thinks that there are still some things about him that she doesn’t know. Leo then realizes something. He asks her could it be that Eros found out that she gave up her job for him [Eros] and that is why he is angry at her, because lately, Feidna has been in the news. Aghast, Lele says that Taylor did remove the outside disturbances like television and telephone during Eros’ recovery. Eros himself also closed his cellphone so that he won’t be disturbed so could it be that..

At the magazine stand, Eros has read in the magazine about Feidna working with Devereaux. He goes back to his apartment to find Feidna waiting for him outside. After Feidna stands up, they look at each other’s eyes and she hugs him. She tells him that she misses him so much. Without any reaction, Eros congratulates her for her success and asks if she is okay. Crying, Feidna says that he obviously knew that she isn’t okay and he is really bad for not answering her message and calls. She calls him a liar for saying that only she needs him, he will forever be at her side, and forever protect her. She tearfully tells him that while she is covered with bruises caused by that jerk, he [Eros] is dating [/going steady] with some other girl. Eros asks if she came to see him. She tells him that when she has nowhere else to go, the first thing that she’ll think of is him, but that hostess came out of his house and suddenly exerts some authority[/dominion]. She tells him that she sent him a lot of messages. “Could it be that you didn’t get to see it?” Eros is speechlessly tense. Somewhat smiling, Feidna says that it turns out to be true. Standing in front of them, Lele says that it is true, she was the one who deleted all of the messages. “Sorry about that. It seems that relationship between the two of you, isn’t that simple, like some ex-lovers..” Eros [and/or] Feidna looks surprised. Lele asks if she can go to his house and get the rest of her clothes. The two watch Lele go in. After 10 minutes, irked and flustered Lele goes out again with her huge bag. She glares at sweatdropping Eros as she passes by them. Then, Eros quickly grabs the handle of her bag. Lele shouts what’s his problem. Eros says that they have to talk. He tells Feidna to go inside his house first. While Eros is pulling Lele away, Lele is protesting and shouting for him to let her go. Feidna looks flustered. Soon, Eros is already carrying Lele on his shoulder. Lele is crying for him to let her go and where he is going. Eros exclaims that they are going to her house for he doesn’t want to lose control and beat her up in the streets. As they pass by Leo who is going to wash some clothes, Eros tells him to step aside for a moment. Lele is screaming for Leo to save her. Inside, Eros throws Lele on the sofa chair. The two glare at each other. Lele starts emoting what Feidna said ‘You liar! You said that only I need you, you’ll forever be at my side, you’ll forever protect me’. With folded arms, Lele sarcastically apologizes that she didn’t know that he made a promise to quickly run to Feidna.

Sweatdropping, Eros quietly looks at her. Lele thinks that the one who still stands in the most important place of his heart is still Feidna so he didn’t tell her to stay when she said that she is moving out of his house. Teary-eyed, Lele looks away from him. Eros tells her that about that thing, he’ll tell her about it later on but first, explain to him what this is about. He holds the magazine about Feidna. He asks her what this is about Feidna taking her throne as Devereaux girl. He had called up Nick and it was confirmed to him that she refused this big opportunity with Devereaux. Lele starts calling Nick a traitor. Chibi Nick says that he is also forced [to tell]. Eros shouts for her not to change the topic. Eros asks her if she gave up her work for him. Blushing Lele denies it by saying that she is tired from work so she wants to rest and has he forgotten how much she hated him before. Serious Eros tells her not to lie to him. “Answer me truthfully! Love or your [future] prospects [/career], which is more important?” Pouting Lele looks at him. Then, she shouts that his health is more important for there will still be work opportunities later on, and she won’t lose her job just because of that. Eros tells her that during that time even without her, he would be a bit hard up but he won’t die. But then, she might not be able to find someone like Devereaux who can push her up as a model. He asks her if her ambition is just that small and just because of love, she would give up on her dream. He also asks her if she actually didn’t think of the future, and she is just following her mother’s footsteps. He tells her if that is so, then she is truly mediocre that makes him lose appetite. Lele is surprised by that. Teary-eyed, she asks him why he said that. Clenching her fist and bowing down, Lele says, so..for him, her feelings has no meaning [/importance].

Eros grabs her hand and calls her an idiot. “Look at me! Right now, I really like you that I like you to death, but there is also a possibility that tomorrow, I’ll dump you! Understand? In this world, there is no one who can be more dependable, other than yourself! I am asking you to please take good care of yourself!” Lele thinks that Eros has seen through her weakness. The current her actually only thinks of attaching herself to his side, and it is alright even if there is no ‘herself’. But then, he is also right, what is her dream. Is it only to become a model just like her mother? And then, what.. Somewhat sober, Lele asks him what she ought to do right now. Eros tells her to get the quickest flight back to Paris and once again, get Devereaux to pay attention to her. Lele exclaims if he wants her to fight up front against Feidna. Eros flicks her forehead and tells her not to be petty. He exclaims if she thinks that in this whole fashion world, there are only her and Feidna. He starts to lecture her that on stage, they forever need very remarkable people to support them. Superior models have their own brilliance. “You only have to make Devereaux know your worth! That doesn’t necessarily [/definitely would] threaten Feidna’s existence. *points at her* If you don’t go, don’t come see me again, from here on!” Then, Eros slams the door on the way out. Leo asks Lele what happened, what they are quarreling about. He starts to pacify crying Lele who shouts that the silver-eyed monster is a scoundrel. Then, Eros looks thoughtful while standing outside the door. He returns to his apartment to find Feidna waiting for him inside. Gesturing to a vase filled with roses, Feidna tells Eros that Lele had left a mark in this house. “Did you really let her live together with you?” Emotionless Eros says yes. She asks, “And things about yourself that you won’t tell me.. you have also told her everything?” Eros says yes. Flustered and teary-eyed, Feidna asks, “So.. this time around, I really should let you go..?” Without any hesitation, Eros once again says, “Yes.” Next chapter will be out in Taiwan on March 5th. Blurb for the next chapter: “After struggling, Lele finally flew back to Paris to meet up with Devereaux! Glenn gave her a difficult problem that it is necessary for her to get through it, before he would consider collaborating with her again..”

Scans by Icy_Chrisy for baidu.

Kyou, Koi wo Hajimemasu [Side Story Part 2 of 2]

2012-02-06T11:41:00.003+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on February 3, 2012

Cover page: “To be able to meet you and mutually fall in love. Right now, the two hold hands as they go towards the future--” Half-imagination/reality: While putting his arm around Tsubaki who looks sad and flustered, Hiro tells Kyouta on the phone that it is room 308. It is a room among numerous hotels in the tourist city of Kyoto. “If you can find it, then how about try finding it?” End of Half-imagination/reality. Kyouta takes out his laptop computer and search the location of the Kyoto beauty school that Tsubaki and Hiro went to for this trip. He thinks that room ought to be in the surrounding hotels of the school. Kyouta gets his cellphone and starts calling. When the receptionist of Kyoto Fuuga Hotel answers, Kyouta asks if there is a certain guest by the name of Hananoi Hiro, residing in their room 308. The receptionist apologizes that she cannot confirm to him whether this person is in their hotel. Kyouta thinks that in the end, he has to go to each and every hotel to look for Tsubaki. Then, he remembers Hiro telling him that he will go to Italy next year, and even if he makes a move on Tsubaki, she will be far away from him so it already doesn’t matter anymore. Kyouta slams his hands on the table. He goes out of his apartment and starts running out to find Tsubaki. In room 308, Tsubaki is blushing. She says, “Hananoi-san.. That.. this is embarrassing so please stop..” Smiling Hiro asks what she is talking about. “Until I’m satisfied, I won’t stop.” Sitting on the bed in a bathrobe, Tsubaki thinks that it is so embarrassing to be wearing only a bathrobe in front of someone else. While brushing her hair, Hiro says that her hair was quickly turned back to black after it was dyed blond, and it will be bad if she didn’t protect it after washing her hair. Tsubaki asks if her clothes aren’t dry yet. Hiro says that he doesn’t know, and if it is dry, the hotel staff would bring them back. Then, Hiro notices that Tsubaki is sadly looking at her cellphone on the table. Tsubaki is surprised when Hiro says that it is too bad, that while she is taking a shower, he [Kyouta] didn’t call.. “(and right now, I even shut it off) What is it? Are you waiting for a phone call? Didn’t you say that you don’t want to be together with him?” Tsubaki clarifies that no, she wants to be together because it is quite rare for them to see each other once again. “But for me to be filled with such resentful [/dissatisfied] moodiness, I don’t want him to see the me, who is quite disappointing.”

While blow-drying her hair, Hiro says that she isn’t that disappointing. This surprises Tsubaki. Hiro tells her that if there is a guy who would usually stay at his girlfriend’s house, and she would wear clothes like that, he would also not be able to stand it. Tsubaki asks him if that is true, and isn’t it because she is just being petty. Puzzled, Hiro says that normally, in that situation, one will be resentful. “But, because during a long distance relationship, one does not want to let the other see one’s disappointing self, and making a mistake on a precious opportunity to see each other. So when will you guys be able to see each other again?” Tsubaki says that she’ll calm herself down, and sort out her mood. “And afterwards, it will be okay, as I endure it a bit.” Smiling Hiro says, “Ha-? It is necessary for you to endure that kind of boyfriend, every time you see each other, then what’s the sense of going steady?” This surprises Tsubaki. Hiro says, “..Hibino.. *holds her hair to her* Try touching it, it is very supple ☆” Tsubaki is shock. She touches it and exclaims how it is possible to make her hair like that. She exclaims that it would be good if he did it in front of a mirror [for her to see]. Hiro tells her that that kind of expression is really amazing, and it is the same kind of expression during the public lecture. Tsubaki exclaims that it is because she saw a really amazing technique. He asks her if she still remembers what he told her this morning. It is ‘based on different circumstances, there’s a need to exchange[/switch] with that person’. Sitting on the bed with Tsubaki, Hiro hold her head and says, “Hibino, compared to the you who is thinking of your boyfriend, you are more lively when you are with me. ..so, so won’t it be better for you to just go steady with me?” Tsubaki looks surprised at him, and Hiro pulls her to him. Ding dong.. Grumpy Kyouta isn’t pleased to see a punk guy opening the door of room 308. The punk asks who he is. Kyouta bows and apologizes for the mistake. While the guy is puzzled, Kyouta turns around to walk away. Holding a small map, he thinks that if she isn’t in the next hotel, he would have to make a new search with a larger scope. “I also don’t know if that room 308 is true or not.. *crumples paper and looks serious* Even if it’s not true, I also have no way of just sitting in the house and wait.. *running* Next is Hotel Royal.”
Back in Hotel Royal, while Hiro is hugging her, Tsubaki says, “..yes. It is true that when I’m with you, Hananoi-san, I always feel very excited. But, I’m moved just because of your techniques. If I see other people having that kind of exquisite skill, no matter who that person is, I think I will have that kind of expression. *pushes Hiro away* And, there is only one person who can make my heart beat fast by just thinking of him. *happily smiles at Hiro* That is Tsubaki-kun and no one else.” Later on, Hiro just stands with fallen shoulders. Ding dong. Hiro opens the door and says, “You’re so slow, Tsubaki-kun. *smiles* It’s really too bad that Hibino had just left.” Hitting the wall, Kyouta angrily asks why. “You scoundrel, what did you do to Tsubaki..?!” Holding his hand up, Hiro shakes his head and says, “Do what.. I only did something that made her thank me and nothing more, okay?” Flashback: Ding dong. The hotel staff called out and said that the clothes are dry. Tsubaki exclaimed, ‘coming’. She went to the door and exclaims that it is amazing that it is already totally dry. After closing the door, Tsubaki happily exclaims, “Hananoi-san! Thank you for once again for making me understand, these feelings of mine towards Tsubaki-kun! Making me want to go and confront that disappointing side of myself!!” End flashback. Looking dazed, Hiro lets out a huge sigh. Kyouta is puzzled over what Hiro meant by being thanked. Hiro says, “And also, how is it possible for me to do something strange to Hibino, when I will only be going to Italy for just two weeks. *Kyouta angrily exclaims, ‘Ha?!’* It is very tiring to be with a girl whom one can’t lay a hand on for the whole night so I wanted you to come and get her.. In the end, you came too late.” Kyouta turns around and starts to angrily mutter that Hiro is a scoundrel. Hiro calls for him to wait, isn’t he going to ask him where Hibino went. Kyouta exclaims if that is something that needs to be asked. “Of course, she’ll go to my house.” Hiro remembers the time when he came to see that his girlfriend already has someone else. He sadly smiles and says, “..those two and the me at that time [/kind of situation] is completely different.. I also want to find someone like Hibino, a girl like that..”
While walking back home, Kyouta sees Tsubaki walking ahead of him. She is surprised when he suddenly hugs her from behind. Blushing Tsubaki calls out his name and asks why. He apologizes to her for making her feel uneasy. “But, you also ought to say it out, your dissatisfaction, and whatever it is that you are thinking. Don’t just drop everything and run away without saying anything.” Tsubaki says that he is right, and she’s sorry. “It is absolutely impossible for me to hate you.” From hugging each other in the starry night sky, they move to kissing and making out in Kyouta’s room with a made-up starry sky using the projector. After making love, Tsubaki says that finally, the ‘three year plan’ is complete. Kyouta asks her if she isn’t happy. Tsubaki says that of course, she is happy. “But, afterwards, we don’t have any promises anymore so I’m somewhat lonely..” Kyouta looks surprised. Then, Tsubaki suddenly sits up and covers herself. She exclaims that speaking of promise, did he saw it. Kyouta asks her that things have already reached here, and she is still shy about that. Kyouta tells her that tomorrow, after his work, he would want to go to a certain place with her. She asks him, where. Looking thoughtful and serious, Kyouta says that it is a secret. Tsubaki is puzzled. Kyouta holds her head to him and kisses her. Then, they lie down back in bed. Later on, Tsubaki blushes over a cute polar bear ring. While thinking that those polar bear stuff are cute, Tsubaki exclaims that it turns out that the place where he wants to go is a jewelry store, but she doesn’t know what would be nice, for her to buy. Kyouta just goes straight to the saleslady. While Tsubaki is thinking that the necklace is also very cute, Kyouta tells her to hold out her hand for him. Tsubaki just did as told, and it is only after he puts on a ring when she looks at her hand. While Tsubaki is surprise and nervous about it, Kyouta tells the saleslady that the measurement is right, so he’ll take that..and just let Tsubaki wear it.
As the saleslady thanks him for his purchase, Kyouta is already dragging bewildered Tsubaki out. He tells her that they go to the roof before she goes to the Shinkansen station. While she is protesting what this is, Tsubaki notices that there is also a ring on Kyouta’s finger. She asks him if it is a matching pair of rings. Kyouta somewhat blushes. At the roof, while carrying her bag, Kyouta tells her that because it will be very uneasy to be in a long distance relationship wherein they weren’t able to always see each other. “So, I think that it will be better to have a proof that we’re going steady. And so, the next promise is even if we don’t know how many years is needed, *holding her hand* but before buying the real rings, let us continue on going steady. *smiles* --okay?” Tsubaki wonders if the ‘real rings’ he is referring to, are wedding rings. Tsubaki tightly holds his hand and says that of course, it is a promise. “But before that, how much does the half cost?” Kyouta is shock. Then, he tells her that no, it is alright, and the mood.. Tsubaki insists that it isn’t alright for if she didn’t properly pay the money.. Kyouta says ya. “That-- *hugs Tsubaki* Then..you quickly come and see me.” Blushing Tsubaki happily smiles. While holding hands, Tsubaki tells him that about the real ring, actually it is difficult to realize that plan, so it is necessary to strive one’s best. Tsubaki is puzzled when Kyouta tells her that it is also okay that she doesn’t strive really hard. “Because, I.. *smiles* won’t accept anyone else, except you, Tsubaki.” Tsubaki happily smiles and exclaims, “Me, too..!” Later on, the scene changes to [what I think is] San Francisco, USA. At a beauty salon, a receptionist welcomes a customer who asks that her haircut and styling be done by that Japanese whose name sounds like ‘Smith=smith’..for her hair was done well the last time. Looking at the appointment book, the receptionist tells her that girl is free right now. Tsubaki greets the customer, “Hello. I’m Tsubaki Tsubaki. Please to meet you!” While Tsubaki putting on the cape over the customer, the customer says that it is such a disaster that the surname of the person she likes is the same with her name. Tsubaki happily smiles and says no, for her, this is some sort of fate so she really likes it. At a house in the suburbs, there are a married couple polar bear, small stuffed toys. Then, there is a small pillow with ribbons and beads beside the toys. In the middle of the pillow, there is a pair of rings. Taking one of the rings from the pillow, Tsubaki happily look at the ring on her finger. She thinks, “Six year plan..”
She puts on the ring [given in Kyoto] on her ring finger where her wedding ring is. Then, the old ring is stuck midway her finger. The door opens and Kyouta arrives. Kyouta asks her what she is doing. Tsubaki is sitting on the floor with her left hand behind her back. The toys and pillow are on the floor. Tsubaki welcomes him home. Kyouta asks her if she was able to properly work. Tsubaki asks him what made him ask. Picking up the bride polar bear from the floor, Kyouta says that it is because of him, that she came to live in the United States. “Honestly speaking, I’m very worried about you. *teasing smile* Because your English is totally no good.” Tsubaki tells him that she always thought that there is a possibility of going to the United States, because talking about universe[/space], the first thing in one’s mind is NASA [National Aeronautics and Space Administration; agency of the United States government that is responsible for the nation's civilian space program and for aeronautics and aerospace research. Source: wiki]. “And then, at that time, I felt very happy because this job of being a hairstylist is an international profession *smiles and blushes* so I can always be with you, Tsubaki-kun..! Even if I’m also very uneasy over my English but I’ll do my best to learn it!” Then, Kyouta lets out a laugh that Tsubaki asks him what’s up. Kyouta asks her what that thing is, did she become fat. Tsubaki is embarrassed for he is referring to the stuck ring on her finger. Tsubaki exclaims that it is edema [/swelling]. Laughing, Kyouta just says, ya ya, he’ll help her take it off. Tsubaki exclaims, “The doctor said that it is very likely that I’ll have edema!! *touching her belly* It is already three months old.” After looking surprised, Kyouta hugs her. Blushing, he says, “Ah- for real? Is that so. ..then, in the end, the name will be Tsubaki Camellia, right!?” [Tsubaki = camellia in English] Blushing Tsubaki holds slightly blushing Kyouta and laughs. Kyouta isn’t too happy at being laughed at. Narration: “From today on, deeply loving you everyday, we’ll always be together.” Blurb: “Thank you for your support during this long period of time!! Minami-sensei’s new work will be published on August 4th ♥”
Scans by 水银工作室.

Ojousama wa Oyomesama [Chapter 94]

2012-02-03T11:11:00.002+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 30, 2012

Flashback: Young Miju pouted and told young Yuuga that she wants to return to their old house. Miju whined that she hates this small loft, small and dirty, and the next door is also disgusting. The station and the school are both far away, and their old house had a courtyard. Yuuga told her that it can’t be helped because their parents divorced, and she better not mention those things to their mother. Miju said that she knows that it is because their system of values isn’t the same anymore. Yuuga didn’t reply. He wondered what they told her. Teary-eyed, Miju said, “..but, even if it is like this, why should we have to live separately? Why..can’t everyone just live together?” End flashback. Yuuga wakes up from his dream. He hears some noise in the kitchen. Reading a cookbook, Towako is cooking. Yuuga suddenly grabs her from behind and asks what she is doing. Towako says that she is making hamburgers for the bento box. Yuuga looks at the unidentified censored thing that Towako is cooking on the pan. Putting on his glasses, Yuuga pushes Towako aside. He tells her that he’ll do it, and he really can’t be at ease without Tsubaki around. When Towako tries to protest that this is the job of a wife, Yuuga gives her a kiss and tells her that her job is ‘this’. He smiles and says, “Understand?” Blushing, Towako just mutters in agreement, and she can’t believe he did that when they are in the public[/shared] kitchen. She can’t help but be frustrated for she felt that she had lost against Yuuga, but then, at least, she helped prepare the ingredients. Soon, Yuuga has finished cooking a Japanese-style breakfast of rice, fish, miso soup and pickles. Towako exclaims that he is amazing and how did he do it. Yuuga says that he is already used to it, since he has been doing it, even before they got married. He would do it either at work or at the kitchen. Towako looks thoughtful and thinks that this is giving her the feeling of reality. She comments that before, Yuuga would cook, clean, do the laundry.. passing his everyday life in such a small narrow house without any company..it’s so amazing. Yuuga angrily asks if she is praising him[/exaggerating].

Then, Yuuga remembers crying young Miju. He tells her that if she finds it hard, then they should go back to the Kanmitsuki residence. This surprises Towako. She exclaims what he is saying and this is no big deal. “What’s more important is to live a quiet life together with you, Yuuga! *turning around* Okay- let’s quickly get ready or else, we will be late for school!” Yuuga smiles over what Towako said. After getting ready for school, Towako and Yuuga peek out to see the coast is clear before hurriedly going out. While going to school, Yuuga asks why they are doing this sneakily. Towako says that she doesn’t want Setsuna to find them for if he did, Setsuna might make them go back. Yuuga tells her that he thinks that Setsuna already knows where they live. The two exclaims in shock when Setsuna suddenly appears and says that is right. While Towako is exclaiming his name, Setsuna happily tells them to please don’t be like that, as if they had seen a ghost. He also tells them not to sneakily do that for he already knew where they live and work. “But, relax, I understand sis’ feelings.. I won’t ask you guys to come back. *Towako is touched by what he said.* So in exchange, don’t be reckless, and if there is anything up, you can still come and look for me. *shining* On the side of economy, don’t be shy and just ask. I have money.” Towako sweatdrops and thinks that he’s sparkling. Towako says that compared to them, she would ask him to take care of their parents. She apologizes for the trouble. Setsuna says that it is okay, he won’t let Ritsuki lay his hands on them [/parents]. He informs them that it seems that Ritsuki is absent today, but still, it would be better if they be careful a bit. Towako says ya. Towako blushes when Setsuna tells Yuuga that he’ll leave his sister to him. Yuuga tells him that without him saying that, he will also do that. Setsuna angrily smiles and says that in the end, he infuriates him. Yuuga angrily says that it is more so, for him. Towako smiles and mentally thanks Setsuna.
After the couple leaves, Setsuna calls out if Tsubaki is there. Tsubaki comes out from behind some bushes and asks him what it is. Setsuna says that he knows that she cannot leave his sister’s side. He tells her that there has been no news of any activity from Ritsuki’s side, and it really worries him. “I don’t know what they will do next, so continue on protecting sister.” After a pause, Tsubaki tells him that even if he doesn’t say it, she will do it. Then, she quickly departs. Setsuna laments over receiving that same kind of reply. In the classroom, Towako has been thinking that after growing up, guys can be quite dependable, and why does it feel that she is abandoned by Setsuna. Then, she is surprised that the teacher has been calling her, ‘Gokurakuin-chan’. Snapping out of it, Towako exclaims, “Yes! Ah! No! That’s not right! *stands up* I’m Takatou Towako!” Yuuga and the others are shock. They all ask, Takatou..not Gokurakuin, did they get married. Towako couldn’t answer back because Yuuga wants to keep this a secret from everyone, and he will be angry. When the others are asking Yuuga to say something, he hits his fist on the table and says, “What’s strange about that!?” Everyone shuts up and mutters, nothing, totally nothing [strange about it]. Towako blushes and smiles because before, Yuuga obviously was nervous about this being exposed, and he would have a bad temper about it. “If there is something that Yuuga needs[/wants], whatever it is, I would do it.” Soon, Towako volunteers to do something in class and Reimi grudgingly gives her the forms. At work, a co-worker asks why they have the same surname, is she a relative of Yuuga. Towako says that she is his wife. Another co-worker says that it is hard to distinguish between Tokura-kun and Tokura-chan, so can’t she just call her Towako. Towako says no, it has to be Tokura. Overhearing this, Yuuga quietly blushes. Then, she is busy with her waitress job.
Later at night, Yuuga is waiting outside a public bathhouse. Towako goes out and apologizes for the wait. He tells her that she didn’t blow dry her hair, she might catch a cold. She tells him that it took her a bit long to take a bath and it isn’t good to make him wait. Yuuga says that it is nothing. Towako says that he’ll catch a cold. Then, they see a boy with his parents. The boy is pulling his mother and shouting for her to quickly go. Yuuga notices that Towako is looking at them. Towako says that it is just a harmonious family. She tells him that when she is young, her parents are rarely at home because of work, and she always felt lonely. “But, mama said, ‘If you are lonely, look at the moon. Even if you are in a far away place, papa and mama are also looking at the same moon.’ From then on, whenever I’m lonely, I would look at the moon. *looks up* Today is the first day of the [lunar] month, so the moon can’t be seen.. *holding Yuuga’s arm* but it is alright! *smiles* The most important person is at my side! (the most important, and irreplaceable person)” Yuuga tells her that he’ll help her blow dry her hair when they return home. Towako says okay. Then, when Yuuga is blow drying her hair, there is suddenly a brownout. Then, Towako happily hug Yuuga. Narration: “For only the two of us to live together, it felt that our hearts are close to each other. I’m really very happy, really! Really.. But..” Yuuga wakes up at night. He sits up to find Towako missing from his side. Then, he sees her looking out from the curtain window. He is surprised to see her crying for she misses her family, and the others. And below the starry night, Yuuga hugs Towako from behind to comfort her.
Scans by 依蓮扫漫組.

Mei-chan no Shitsuji [Chapter 118]

2012-01-29T17:12:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 28, 2012

Flashback: Xiang stood amidst of fire and smoke. He thinks, “..that, fundamentally is punishment. Within my heart, the desire to ‘monopolize’. Making the goddess, mother planet, to get angry.. So.. *scene of Rishu dead* but, this time, it isn’t.. *looks seriously at Mei who is shielding herself from the explosion. He took off his coat and put it over Mei.* This time, definitely.. I’ll absolutely protect her well..” While Xiang pulled Mei to him to protect her, Mei is surprised when he muttered, ‘Rishu..’ Mei wondered who that is. The ship exploded and the two fell into the water. While sinking in the water, Mei remembered a lecture before. Flashback 2: A nun told Mei and others that the butler’s clothes aren’t ordinary ones, rather, it is a high precision defensive cloth. It can withstand any attacks. Whether the scorching hot fire, or extremely cold water, it can still protect the body very well. So, by just wearing it, one will be completely safe. Miruku exclaimed then they should all wear it. Rika doesn’t want to wear that bad/crude kind of clothes. Fujiko wanted people to see more of her skin. Izumi told Miruku that it would be a bit heavy for her. Miruku sighed that it is quite cunning that only butlers have that kind of clothes. Mei told her that is enough, for butlers have a lot of problems to deal with. Later on, Rihito told Mei that the clothes’ real use isn’t to protect the butler. For at the crucial moment, it is to protect the very important ojousama. Or, one should say that it is their very important doppelganger/replacement. Rihito put his coat on Mei and said that it is like this, and one won’t do this kind of thing to anyone. “It is not limited that, one can even sacrifice oneself, to protect that person.” End flashback 2.

Mei woke up and saw that Xiang has lost consciousness. Just when he let her go, Mei quickly grabbed his hand. She pulled open the float within Xiang’s butler coat. Tightly holding on to Xiang, Mei rose to the surface. Then, something hits her head. She looks to the side to see that it is Shiori’s wheelchair. She quickly put unconscious Xiang on the wheelchair and starts kicking the water to swim ashore. End flashback. Scene: Sleeping Mei is lying on Xiang’s lap. Xiang thinks that finally, he[/they] did their best in attain the goal of [getting the] world’s number one ojousama, Mei-ojousama. To Xiang’s surprise, Mei opens her eyes and asks, “Mei? Who is that?” Then, Mei becomes Rishu. End scene. Xiang wakes up after hearing Mei shouting that finally, it caught a bit of fire. It turned out to be just a dream. Naked down to his underwear and covered with his coat, Xiang sits up and sees Mei trying to make fire by rubbing a stick on a piece of wood. Mei is wearing only her undergarments. Mei happily says that he is awake. Mei urges him to hurry for there is a bit of fire there, and it can help him warm up. Xiang tries to decline but Mei just tells him that their clothes are all wet. She apologizes for helping him strip off his clothes. “The weather is quite good so I think they ought to quickly dry up. Ah, it would be much better, if you keep wearing that coat!” Soon, the two quietly sit by the bonfire that Mei made to warm themselves. She tells him that this place has a small island, and she can still see dry land so she thinks that it shouldn’t be far away. She wonders out loud if Kento and Rihito are okay.

Xiang asks her why she saved him. Mei tells him that about that..there is someone who is drowning in front of her, of course, she ought to save him, and does she need to explain that. Xiang tells her that for making him live, he will still go and get rid of the Shibata brothers. “They are only a burden to you, as long as those two are at your side.. You’ll [only] pass through this life confused. Mei-ojousama, I wish that you’ll possess a bigger dream.” After thinking for a while, Mei calls out to him and asks who Rishu is. Xiang looks surprised and asks how come she knew of that name. Mei says that while he was unconscious, he would keep on calling that name. Looking away, Xiang tells her that it has been such a long time ago..a childhood friend. Mei asks, “Could it be that I’m the substitute of that person?” Looking slightly flustered, Xiang denies that it is so..and it is absolutely not that. To his surprise, Mei smiles and tells him that it is alright, even if it is so. She asks him what’s up about what he said about true happiness. “I don’t quite understand, but.. to be living like this, it ought to be considered as ‘very happy[/lucky]’, right? *smiles* Thank you for protecting me.” Xiang blushes a bit. Then, Mei hears some sounds of a helicopter flying overhead. Mei exclaims that it is a helicopter and it might be Rihito and the others. Mei excitedly calls out ‘here, here’. Then, to her surprise, Xiang covers her mouth. Mei noticed that the fire had been put out. He tells her, “Mei-ojousama, have you forgotten? There are still five days before your birthday, and on that day, whoever [man] you brought in front of Kintarou-sama, will become your husband.. I have already decided, Mei-ojousama, that I will absolutely not give you away to any other man.” Flustered Mei is surprised by this.

Scans by 17kkmh.com

Tonari no Kaibutsu-kun [Chapter 34]

2012-01-29T17:09:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 27, 2012

Lying on the living room’s floor, Shizuku thinks that it can’t be helped if she can’t become friends with Yamaken. She looks at the side at laughing Haru who is watering the plants. She asks him why he is in her house everyday. Title: On the Next Summer Vacation, part 3, the last summer Blurb: “Everyone, life’s experience hurts a bit, and it makes one become mature a bit.. Although you still don’t know, but one day, you’ll definitely pass through, a beautiful [period of] time-” The cicadas are chirping. Asako is standing in front of the game center. She looks nervous. She thinks that she will do it as she practiced, just give Micchan the souvenir. She also thinks that she even wore the mature heeled sandals that she brought during the trip. She starts climbing up the stairs, and then she quickly goes down the stairs. She berates herself that it is meaningless if she just goes out. Then, Haru sees her and asks what she is doing there. Haru asks her if she wants to eat some takoyaki. He tells her that auntie [/woman owner] sold those to him even if she is researching on using ice cream during summer but it all melted. Turning to leave, Asako says that she will go home first. Haru notices the bag that she is carrying. Then, Haru asks Asako if she has finished her school work for summer. Later on, at Shizuku’s house, she asks why Haru and Asako are there. Then, she let it pass since they are studying. Reading from his notes, Haru says that they will start with mathematics, the first page’s first problem is θ = 30°+360° x n, and the answer is 150° + 360° x n. Copying what he said, Asako exclaims that she doesn’t know how to write θ. Shizuku sweatdrops and tells them that it is meaningless for them to do the schoolwork like this. Shizuku asks Haru if he has finished his homework. Haru tells her that he finished it at the start of summer vacation because it is no big deal for him. Shizuku says that his class progress is slow. He tells her that right now, he is doing the free homework of Oga-sensei’s decoration[/putting things in order]. Asako comments that Haru is more serious in that field [of beautifying the class]. It is already August, midway of a busy summer which has become a summer as it used to be [in the past]. Shizuku calls out to Takaya to help out since she is tidying up the garden. Takaya asks if it is okay, not to do it today. Fixing her hat, Shizuku tells him that it is a necessity to tidy up for Obon festival, and isn’t he going to grandma’s house. She also tells him that he should wear his hat since it is hot. After going downstairs, Takaya greets Natsume and Yoshida..then, changes it to Haru. Haru happily greets back and asks if the jam that he [Haru] got, was delicious. Asako happily tells Takaya that this will be the future, Haru will be a ‘brother’.

Putting on his cap, Takaya sits at the porch and thinks that this is super complicated. While watering the plants in her school PE uniform, Shizuku tells Takaya to take out the props from the water jar, and then tidy things up in the warehouse. Shizuku thinks that it is quite rare but she wants to plan some vegetables like cucumber and eggplants. Takaya asks her if she is ‘intensely passionate’ with Haru. This surprises Shizuku. Looking at the plants that she is watering, Shizuku says that theory-wise, it is indeed ‘intensely passionate’. Thinking that his sister is shy, Takaya says is that so, then that’s really good. Blushing Shizuku wonders where did Takaya learn about those words, and in the end, she still has no way of properly talking with Haru during the camping trip. “Until now, I still don’t quite understand the meaning of going steady.” Back in the living room, Asako apologizes to Haru. She admits that today, she planned on giving a souvenir to Micchan but just like before, she couldn’t naturally face him. She tells him that she still doesn’t what kind of face she should have in facing him. Haru assures her that she has nothing to worry about for Micchan is a very good guy. At the game center, Yuuzan is carrying to huge paper bags of food. He tells Micchan that these are souvenirs. While Yuuzan put all sorts of jams on the counter, Micchan asks if he really went. Opening the jam, Yuuzan says yes, and he bumped into Haru and Shizuku. Gloomily breaking the baguette, Yuuzan tells Micchan that those two’s relationship is harmonious and Mitsuyoshi couldn’t understand the feeling of an older brother whose younger brother got something first, and now, Haru has a girlfriend. Micchan tells him to quickly find a girlfriend and don’t do any unnecessary things. After putting some jam on half of the baguette, pouting Yuuzan complains over how everyone considers him as some bad guy, and for them to say that, makes him want to hinder them more, and he will definitely hinder them. Then, Micchan tells him to stop being like that and, asks him if he had seen the person whom he truly wants to see. Yuuzan sighs and says yes, forget it. He asks what Haru is doing. Micchan tells him that Haru is at Shizuku’s house everday, and he mentioned about planning vegetables at the courtyard. Yuuzan says that it really makes him feel envious. Back at Shizuku’s place, Haru comes in with a rake and tells Shizuku that he has finished throwing away the grass and stones. Shizuku says is that so, then come and rest for a while. Looking at a book, Shizuku asks him what he thinks. Haru says that they still need more soil, also some lime and fertilizer. He tells her that Oga-sensei makes them, so tomorrow, he’ll go and get some. The next day, they head to school to get some. They pass by Shitayanagi and others who were jogging. And, Haru waves at Sasayan who is playing at the baseball field.
Then, as it rains, Haru and Shizuku eat watermelons together at the porch. Then, Shizuku says that it has been too natural that she forgot about it. “Haru, why are you coming to my house everyday?” Haru asks if she only thought of it now, why, well, it is because they are going steady, and everyday, there is nothing for him to do anyway. Shizuku sighs and says that Haru hasn’t changed because at her side, she has been thinking of the meaning of ‘going steady’ like an idiot. Surprised, Haru asks if she is still thinking of that. Shizuku says that it is because even if they say that they are going steady, there hasn’t been any change and to put it bluntly, she thinks that she isn’t attaining something. Haru says how could she say that when he helped her a lot, although it is totally not about that. Shizuku says that the rain has stopped. She asks Haru to help him hang dry the finished laundry. Shizuku thinks that there is always no ‘two people in one world’, and does Haru think that way, too. While hanging the laundry to dry, Shizuku says that after studying, she’ll go out shopping so what Haru wants to eat for dinner. Haru declines for today is when he and Micchan eat out for ramen. Then, Haru stares at some panties. Embarrassed Shizuku quickly grabs them and exclaims that he doesn’t have to help her with it. Haru is shock over those kind of luxurious panties of hers. Shizuku asks him if he can’t accept it. They were interrupted by Sasayan who asks them what they are doing. He tells them that he heard from Micchan that Haru is there, and the pictures from camping had already been developed so he brought them. While they were looking at the pictures, Sasayan asks if they are going to the En-nichi [/temple fair] tomorrow. Since Haru doesn’t know about it, Sasayan tells him that a nearby temple is going to have a fair, and a lot of people from their school are going. Sasayan laughs and says that they plan to take pictures of section A. Haru comments that he’s jealous. Shizuku quietly looks at him. After a pause, she slightly blushes and asks him about going together to the En-nichi. Then, they were surprised when Takaya mentions loudly that is nice to have cotton candy and caramel apple. Shizuku says that he returned and how grandma is. Takaya says that her face is filled with wrinkles, and there is no other place he got to go during summer vacation, except for grandma’s house, whereas his sister gets to have lots of fun. Shizuku looks shock-guilty.
The next night at the temple, Sasayan, together with his friends, call out to Haru and others that they are there. Haru, Shizuku and Takaya are all wearing yukata. Takaya is already eating cotton candy. Shizuku greets Sasayan a good evening, and Haru says that he is envious of Sasayan who is surrounded by people, even today. Haru is surprised when Shitayanagi and his mouse, exclaims that he is wearing a yukata. Haru’s two classmates call out that they take pictures. While Haru with his section A classmates take pictures, Shizuku is introducing Takaya to the others, and Sasayan is greeting someone he knows. Then, Asako, who is wearing her new shoes, arrives. She happily goes to Shizuku and Takaya to tell them that they are cute. Shizuku tells her that she asked her mother about borrowing it. Asako notices that Sasayan is looking at her. He asks her if she went to see Micchan. Blushing, Asako looks away and timidly says that she is busy with her new blog so she wasn’t able to. Sasayan reprimands Asako as to what she is doing, because it has been a week since the camping trip. He tells her not to do other stuff, which is obviously her way of running away. Flustered Asako shouts what he is saying all of a sudden, shut up for she came here today to have fun. Trembling in awe, Haru is teary-eyed that after 17 years, it is the first time in his life that he was able to blend in with his classmates. After Shizuku says that they should go, Takaya asks if he can eat three kinds of food that he likes to eat. Shizuku tells him that he already ate a cotton candy, so it is now two kinds of food. Asako exclaims that tonight, she is going to defeat the En-nichi [/win games]. Haru wants to play some shooting games, and boasts that he is an expert in it. He asks Takaya what he wants to have. Takaya tells him the plasma television. Later on, Asako plans to buy a mask. Shizuku is angry that Haru gave Takaya another cotton candy. Soon, they are playing in a shooting gallery booth. Takaya watches his sister who doesn’t seem too happy over the human-squid-like doll Haru won for her because she wants the bunny one. Later on, Shizuku is sitting by herself. Haru approaches her and asks what the matter is. She comments that it is unexpected that he has a yukata. He tells her that it is the lady owner of the takoyaki store made him wear it. The owner said that Haru looked quite the same as her deceased grandfather, but they didn’t look alike after making her let him see the picture. Taking something from his pocket, Haru says that he almost forgot something. Then, there are a couple of flowers on Shizuku’s ear. Haru happily tells her that it is so cute. Haru says that he got the flowers from the niche of the statue, and it really suits her. Blushing Shizuku thanks him. Takaya is watching them.
While eating something, Takaya calls out to his sister and says that he had bumped into Sasayan and others. They had told him about lighting up fireworks so can he go. Shizuku says that social interaction is a necessity so she’ll walk him to that place. Haru wants to go, too, but Shizuku tells him to stay and wait for Asako. While walking, Shizuku asks Takaya if he doesn’t like Haru. Takaya says not really, for he doesn’t really specially like nor hate him. “Sis.. you’re not the same when you are with Haru..” This surprises Shizuku and she wonders in what way. While Takaya runs off to join the others, crying Asako calls out to Shizuku and says that her feet hurt that she can’t walk anymore. While clinging on to Shizuku to help her walk, Asako exclaims that she was able to walk for a short while and she is already worn out. Shizuku angrily says why she wore those shoes. Asako says that it is because she just bought them. They arrive to where Haru is. Haru asks them what they are doing. Then, Chizuru and Yuu meet up with them. They exchange greetings and apology for not able to go to the camping trip even if they were invited. Haru tells Chizuru that the others are taking pictures. Chizuru says that they had also met up with Shitayanagi. Asako says that they went to see Yuu’s boyfriend, Tokita, so how is Okinawa. Yuu says that it is so much fun, and she got to see Tokita for real [/live] after a year of separation. Chizuru tells them that they went to the beach, and at times, eat Okinawa ramen but after passing through such happy days, it became difficult to go back. Flashback: While lighting up fireworks, Yuu said that they would be leaving tomorrow, and time passed by really fast. Tokita said that he had lots of fun, and he anticipates that next year, she can come and hang out with him again. Then, Yuu started to cry. She apologized for she had thought that they won’t be able to meet until next year’s summer. She told him that she had wanted to say goodbye while smiling. Tokita grabbed her shoulder and exclaimed that he will properly study so that he can be in the same university where Yuu will go. He told her that he will definitely get in so that they will be together forever after graduation. While the two hugged each other, Chizuru smiled and is happy for them. End flashback. Yuu says that is how it is but right now, every night, they had been passionately studying together through video chatting[/chatrooms] because Tokita is stupid so he has to work hard. Blushing Asako exclaims in praise over that kind of romance. Shizuku asks if it is okay if one’s college aspiration is decided like that. Haru asks if Tokita is Yuu’s uncle. ^^;
Chizuru tells him that it is Yuu’s boyfriend. Yuu tells Shizuku to forget that, and there is always a way. She mentions to Shizuku about praying at the shrine regarding their studies. Shizuku seems to like the idea, and Haru is laughing that Tokita is stupid. Then, Chizuru asks him what made him think that Tokita is an uncle. Slightly blushing, Asako quietly looks at them. While Yuu congratulates Shizuku and Haru for going steady, Chizuru goes to Asako to give her some adhesive bandage [band aid] for her feet. Asako thanks her and says that it seems Chizuru and Haru’s relationship is quite good. Chizuru says that it is not only her, for right now, Haru can also chat a bit with his other classmates. Asako tells her that isn’t what she meant. Asako becomes embarrassed when Chizuru tells her that she was rejected after Valentine’s day, and he said that he likes someone else, but actually, it is quite good that he told her that because if he didn’t definitely refuse her, for sure, it is impossible for them to be like this right now. After Chizuru and Yuu wave goodbye to the others, Chizuru notices that Yuu is looking at her. Yuu says that it is nothing, and Chizuru has really been striving hard. Slightly pushing Yuu’s head, blushing Chizuru says that Yuu’s nature is very bad. Yuu laughs and tells her to quickly find a boyfriend, and she will help introduce her to some since she knows a lot of guys. Just then, Takaya bumps on to Chizuru and fell. While Yuu says that it is Shizuku’s younger brother, Chizuru holds the caramel apple that Takaya dropped, to him. Giving him back the apple, Chizuru apologizes and asks if he is alright. Takaya looks awed by her and he thanks her. While walking away, Yuu asks Chizuru when she is free, but Chizuru tells her that she told her before that she doesn’t have to do that. Back to the trio, Haru asks what’s next. Shizuku says that according to Yuu’s information, this is a rare opportunity to go visit [shrine/pray]. Haru says that he doesn’t have objections even if he isn’t interested in that. Shizuku asks if Asako can now walk. Asako tells them that she’ll just wait there for them, and it is also meaningless for her to do that [/pray at the shrine]. Just as the two are leaving, Asako happily looks at the two, then she calls out to Shizuku. She tells Shizuku that by liking someone, one ought to want to stay with the other person for a long time, as much as one possibly can. Shizuku looks surprised by this, and Asako smiles back at her.
While walking together with Haru, Shizuku eats a roasted cuttlefish. Blushing, and heart beating loudly, she thinks that it is because Asako said those strange things that she always has been thinking of that aspect. Haru says that he had fun today, and he even met a lot of people. Shizuku looks at him, and blushes really red. She freaks out when Haru suddenly turns around to her and asks if the roasted cuttlefish is delicious, and speaking of that, she always eat cuttlefish. Haru laughs and says that it seems he had to guarantee that there will be cuttlefish. Shizuku tells him that she thinks that as long as they don’t go to an uninhabited island, then there shouldn’t be a problem. Haru says that an uninhabited island isn’t bad, and it seems interesting. “With you around, if I can see you everyday, whatever the place is, it is very nice.” Shizuku looks at him as he happily whistles. Shizuku asks could it be that it is because he likes her, that is why he goes to her house everyday. Puzzled Haru says yes. Shizuku blushes and wonders why Haru’s answers are always very clear. Haru is surprised when blushing Shizuku holds out her hand to him and exclaims, “Give me your hand! Just like before, let’s hold hands. I also like you, Haru.” As they held hands while walking, blushing Haru giggles and says that he felt very shy. Shizuku says ya, even if before they also held hands. Haru tells her that he felt very happy. Shizuku thinks that the premise of ‘mutually liking each other’ is being able to be together. “..it’s very good. This so-called going steady felt really good.” Then, they pass by a goldfish scoop booth. Shizuku says, “..Haru, I want a goldfish.” Elsewhere, Sasayan is calling on the phone as he seems to remember asking Asako if she still likes Micchan. After a pause, Asako seemed to have answered, what about it. Then, Sasayan notices something. He sweatdrops and asks Asako what she is doing. Asako is sitting with the mask on her face. Removing the mask, Asako says that it is to prevent guys from hitting on her. Sasayan asks where Shizuku and the others are. Asako says that it is quite rare so she let those two to be in ‘two people’s world’ and Shizuku still seem to quite understand things but then, she is the same. Feeling guilty, Sasayan admits to her that he talked with Micchan and he told her that he rejected her. Pulling his cap to cover his face, Sasayan says that at that time, he didn’t think that she will be this dejected up to this degree. “..I’ve obviously said that I will support you. I’m sorry.”
Asako says that it is alright, and it has nothing to do with him, for anyway, no matter what she does, the outcome is the same. She tells him that has always been wondering why Micchan bluntly rejected her. Maybe she caused him to say that, or perhaps, because she is still a kid. She says that even if that is so, then, in the end, Micchan is such a kind person for he didn’t vaguely treat what she was feeling [/didn’t beat around the bush]. Later on, Asako writes a message to Shizuku to apologize that she went home to change her shoes because her feet hurt. She wrote that Shizuku just spend time with Haru and while it is convenient, she’ll pass by at Micchan’s place. Wearing flat shoes on her feet that are covered with adhesive bandages, Asako peeks in from the corner. She calls out to Micchan. After he called out her name, Asako goes out to tell him that even if it is late, but she brought him a souvenir from the camping trip. Micchan smiles and thanks her. He asks if she had cheered up a bit. Asako smiles a bit and says yes. Preparing to bid him goodbye, Asako tells him that she is midway on her way back to the En-nichi and she apologizes that the food is going to expire tomorrow. Micchan tells her to come back again next time. Asako looks at him and smiles. While walking downstairs, Asako thinks that she ought to have done well, and she was able to smile. She tells herself that it is alright, and this is really good. Then, she notices that Sasayan has been waiting for her downstairs. She asks why he specially came there. Sasayan says that it is because he is very concerned[/worried]. Asako says, geez, it is already totally fixed, and Micchan also told her to come back again, and she can already act natural. She starts crying and says that for her, she felt that what she did is already quite good. After looking a bit uneasy, Sasayan takes of his cap and puts it on Asako’s head. He tells her that they should go. While pulling Asako’s hand as they walk, Sasayan tells crying Asako that it is alright, for he, and also Haru and Shizuku are by her side, and it is quite good that they can be together during second term. The next day, Shizuku’s water jar is now filled with goldfishes. Takaya asks what that is about. Looking at the fishes, Shizuku tells him that it is goldfishes that Haru helped her win. Shizuku happily thinks that when Haru comes today, they will buy water plants together. While there are some how to take care of goldfish books scattered around, Shizuku asks Takaya if he is finished with his homework for next week, it is back to school. Takaya says that he is going to do it now. Shizuku thinks that yes, days like this are very good and it would be better if it would always continue on like this. Blurb: “So summer vacation of all sorts of interweaved emotions has ended. ..And soon, it will be the incoming new school term!!”
Scans by 離境漢化組.

Kyou no Kira-kun [Chapter 3]

2012-01-29T17:06:00.001+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 24, 2012

Page 3 – Magic Time. Cover page: “I really like sleeping time. I’m very, very envious of Sleeping Beauty, whom my mother told me about when I was a child. Because, that way, I won’t be able to feel anything. Fundamentally, it should be like that.” Nino, together with Sensei, goes downstairs and she is surprised to see Kira eating breakfast with her parents. Her parents greet Nino a good morning. Kira tells Nino that she is too slow, and her hair is still messy. Sensei exclaims to Nino’s mother as to why she let that guy in. Happily donning her sailor uniform as cosplay, Nino’s mother tells him that she just went out to the gate and saw him by chance. “He said that he was waiting for you ♡ You guys have become good friends?! That really makes me happy, and I should inform Yuuji-kun’s father about it.” Nino just looks nervous. Narration: “Kira-kun, he had walked into my ‘daily life’.” During lunch break at the back of the building, Kira tells Nino that regarding the list of wanting to do, he is currently slowly thinking about it. Nino says is that so, then if he is finished, he can show it to her. Sensei exclaims that right now, the place where he really wants to go is the zoo. He says that he longs to go there, where many of his comrades are, and he wants to see the penguins. Then, Kira’s cellphone rings a message. He is surprised to read it. It is from someone named Shitara Mio [guesswork name from 設樂美櫻]. Kira stands up and tells Nino that he will be going to the clinic. Nino exclaims if he is feeling unwell. Kira looks surprised. He flicks her fringes and tells her no, he is only going to lazy around a bit since he is sleepy. Walking away, he tells her to quickly go [back to class/not wait for him]. Holding her fringes, Nino wonders what that is. Sensei says that Kira doesn’t look sleepy at all. Then, Nino wonders what Kira’s ailment is. Then, to her surprise, Yabe, who is standing at the side, calls out to her as Bird Girl. Nino freaks out for it is the ‘shit guy’. She asks what it is. With crossed arms, Yabe asks if she likes Kira. Surprised Nino asks, how can that be.

Yabe tells her, “Then, let me give you an advice first. You shouldn’t be only doing this plaything as a way of passing time, and I’ll tell you something first. That guy already has someone, whom he has always been chasing, to have.” Nino didn’t react and Yabe smiles over this. Yabe proudly asks if she is embarrassed, and it is her fault for being so cocky. Nino just says, ya, is that so. This surprises Yabe that he shouts, “Why don’t you look a bit shock! *embarrassed* Darn it!” Nino lamely says, ya, sorry. Sensei thinks that this guy is a B class. Narration: “Kira-kun, has someone he likes?” At the train, somewhat glum Nino is sitting with sleeping Kira. Then, she overhears a couple of girls saying that it is a handsome guy, and what’s up with the girl beside him, she has a bird on her shoulder. Nino glances at Kira and thinks, “So that’s how it is. I had never considered some of these things. I and Kira-kun are totally different. He is a ‘boy’.” Then, Kira wakes up from his nap. While he is still a bit drowsy, Nino asks him if it is really okay for him to be with her. Kira asks her why she is asking this question all of a sudden. To his surprise, she tells him that he ought to have a girl he likes. Kira looks at Nino who is looking down. He tells her that he admires Tetsuko Kuroyanagi [internationally famous Japanese actress, a talk show host, a best-selling author of children book, a World Wide Fund for Nature advisor, and a Goodwill Ambassador for UNICEF. Source: wiki] and it seemed like there is candy sticking on the hair. Nino tells him that isn’t what she meant. Kira asks back, “How about you? Could it be that you don’t have one?” Kira looks at her, and Sensei seems thoughtful. Looking down again, Nino tells him that she totally has no chance in that kind of thing and not one bit, did she even have that kind of thinking. Kira looks at her and suddenly says that there is no school tomorrow, so she ought to be free. “How about accompanying me a bit?” Nino looks surprised and wonders where they will go.

The next day, they stand in front entrance of a zoo. Nino looks aghast. Sensei looks happy. Massaging his shoulder, Kira says that it has been a long time since he went there. Holding on to a boulder display, trembling Nino asks, what this is about, and what does he plan on doing there. Grabbing her arm, Kira tells her, “What am I going to do here? This is to have fun. You ought to like animals, right? Since you own a parrot. Okay, we are going.” Nino exclaims that she likes them but they hate her so she won’t go in. “Once I encounter a dog, and it chased after me and cats would always snarl at me..” She is surprised when Sensei excitedly calls out, “Curly, are you coming or not--!!” Kira tells Nino to quickly come. Nino wonders why things turn out like that. At a lamb pen where people can feed lambs, Kira is holding out a grass to a lamb. Standing on Kira’s head, Sensei exclaims to be gentle and, it is eating it. Kira tells Sensei to be quiet for there might cause a bad[/opposite] reaction from the lamb. Sensei relents and tells him that he’ll listen to him only for today. Standing at the side, Nino still looks aghast for in the end, she’s afraid. Then, she notices a lamb staring at her. While Sensei is playing with the lamb, Kira tells her to feed the lamb. Nino hesitates by saying no, she will be bitten. She is surprised when Kira grabs her hand and says that it is alright. He put the grass on her hand and made her hold it out to the lamb. To her delight, the lamb starts to eat the grass. Blushing, Nino looks up to him and exclaims, “Kira-kun, Kira-kun, it ate it. It’s so cute.” Kira smiles down to her and says, “Compared to it, you’re cuter.” Surprised Nino blushes over this. Then, they are at the penguin display, Sensei happily flies towards the penguins. While Kira is holding his cellphone to take pictures, Nino asks him, “Why did you go here with me?” Kira looks at her as she looks sideways. Continuing to take pictures, Kira says, “Ah yes, I should say that it is like ‘Magic Time’. That is looking at a beautiful scene, and saying some things as if casting magic. I think dating has this kind of feeling. *takes a picture of Sensei and the penguins, just like what Sensei wanted* It would be such a pity if you don’t know[/experience] that.” Nino looks surprised at him and quietly blushes. Sensei flies over and calls out, “Curly, did you take the picture.” Kira says yes. Then, at the elephant display, Nino and Sensei are puzzled at Kira who is crying because he feels sorry for the elephants. Then, at the souvenir shop, to Nino’s surprise, Kira wants to buy a couple of animal ears hairband. Narration: “Then, you intentionally take time out, just for me?”

Soon, it is night. They were walking at the street. Kira asks if the parrot is sleeping. Nino says that it seems for Sensei played too much that he is tired from always had been flying around. Then, Kira asks her how come it can talk. Nino notices a couple giggling and telling each other that it is cute. She wonders why they are looking at her, and then she realizes that she is still wearing the bunny ears. She quickly removes it and tries to quickly tell Kira about it. Kira keeps on walking and mutters about buying something. Then, Nino decides not to tell Kira about it [probably because it is so cute/she wants to tease him]. Kira mentions about people staring at him, and could it be because that he’s quite handsome. He turns around to look at Nino who had let out a laugh. Kira realizes that he is still wearing the cat ears. Really embarrassed, Kira takes it off and shouts that Nino is a scoundrel for not quickly telling him about it when she realized it. Nino has happily run off ahead. Narration: “Why is it that everything I see felt so gentle.” In front of a photo sticker booth, Sensei, who is already awake, asks if that is the so-called purikura. Nino asks if they are really going to take pictures. Paying the booth, Kira says yes, and this will be a remembrance. Somewhat smiling, Kira says “Didn’t you have lots of fun today?” Nino looks surprised by that question. Sensei exclaims for Kira to quickly push the button. And, there is a count down before the picture is taken. Later on, Sensei is holding the photo and looks really grumpy. Kira tells him to quickly let him see it, the photo sticker. Sensei exclaims no way, for he isn’t happy with it. Nino says that Sensei always look handsome. Sensei exclaims that if he says no, then it is no, and he totally couldn’t accept it. Then, Nino notices a window display of hearts and gifts. The poster says, “‘Come, fall in love’ Competition[/Fighting]”. Sensei asks Nino what’s up. Nino recalls that Yabe told her that there is a girl whom Kira wants to have, and has been chasing after. She calls out to Kira and says, “Kira-kun, in the end, you still have someone you like, right? You still shouldn’t have gone out together with me, right?” Kira looks surprised and says that there is no such person. Nino says that if it is okay, she can help him, and if it is him, it will definitely be no problem. Kira just looks at her when a lover girl exclaims, “Ah, is that true--?” They look at the side to see a couple. The lover boy tells the lover girl that on her next birthday, he will give it to her. The lover girl points out that she wants that color, and it is very beautiful. Kira watches the couple who were lovey-dovey. Then, Kira says, “—by the way, it seems that I have not told you about my ailment. *clenching his t-shirt* It’s a problem with the chest[/heart?]. It is very painful every time it acts up that it makes me wonder if I will quickly die. You have to understand, Okamura, I cannot do that. *lover guy happily told lover girl that as a condition, she will be with him forever, and the girl happily says yes* Even if [I] fallen in love, it will only increase the sadness.” Nino immediately apologizes to him. Kira tells her that it is alright, for she didn’t have any malice in it. “—but, can you let me [alone to] calm down for a while?”

In her room, Nino is lying in bed. Sensei tells her not to be depressed. After a pause, Nino says that she isn’t [depressed], she is reflecting on her impulsive action. “But, I don’t know if this kind of end [of going out together] is really good.” Looking serious, Sensei says that in the end, it is still that guy’s fault for making Nino have that kind of praying expression and she wouldn’t have said those kind of words. To her surprise, Sensei exclaims that he is going to poop on the photo sticker. Quickly grabbing the photo, Nino exclaims that he cannot do that kind of thing. Sensei exclaims that it is because he is quite frustrated for he had never seen Nino have that kind of expression before. Nino looks at the photo sticker, and she looks surprised. While walking home, Kira looks at the sent message from Shitara Mio on his cellphone. He is surprised to see Nino running towards him. Then, Nino trips. ^^; Bending down to help her out, Kira asks what happened that she has to run. She tells him that she wants to see him because she still hasn’t told him. “Today, I really had fun. You had made me quite hyper and excited. I also kind of understand what you were telling me, meeting with a stranger like me. Look. *Kira looks surprised over the photo sticker and they are all happily posing in it* I think that it isn’t definite that it will only increase sadness. Because if you have fallen in love with someone, your heart will definitely be filled up, right?” Kira looks surprised and he sits down. He asks her if she came to look for him just to say these things. Nino exclaims yes. Then, Kira’s tears starts to fall down. Covering his face, he says that she is too pure, and it is troublesome. Nino apologizes to him. Leaning his head on her, Kira says, “Ya, but you can really talk.” He cries and happily hugs her. Nino hugs him back. Sensei angrily breaks up the two and says that is enough, and what’s with that ‘lean’ stuff. Kira says that he is annoying, and he better be careful else he’ll roast him. Sensei angrily shouts what he just said. Kira’s cellphone is peeking out of his pocket. Shitara Mio’s message to Kira was ‘Quickly come and see me’. Narration: “September 23rd. From that day on, I no longer look forward to [becoming] Sleeping Beauty. My heart [/innermost being] has already awakened. Generally, it is like I had been reborn because compared to the Little Mermaid, I felt that [romantic] love is more beautiful.”

Scans by 離境漢化組.

Kyou no Kira-kun [Chapter 2]

2012-01-29T17:04:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 23, 2012

Page 2 – Rainbow. Blurb: “365 days, from morning to night, we’ll be together?!” Written in the diary: “September 16th - Although, I still don’t understand what this feeling is but, I want to be with him in passing through these 365 days. I want to keep on living together with him.” Narration: “-ah ah, right now, there is only one thought in my head. *it is raining outside and Nino who is lying on her bed, looks really gloomy* Regret. *looking at her diary* I don’t want to go to school, not one bit.. I’ve obviously do not want to have a relationship with anyone, then why would I write this stuff..? And at that time, I’ve impulsively cut my fringes and even said those words. *There is a scene of Nino holding out her hand to Kira and told him that she will be at his side, always until he dies* Speaking of that, *sighs* up to what degree would I be staying at his side..” Sensei flies over her and tells her that it is bad, go and look out the window. Carrying her school bag, Nino asks him what it is. Sensei tells her to look at that. Nino looks down the window. Nino and Sensei are dumbstruck to see Kira, who is holding an umbrella, sitting by the gate, outside the rain. Nino exclaims if he was waiting for her. Sensei exclaims that is the only possibility that he can think off. This made Nino hurry outside even if Sensei is a bit reluctant. In maid outfit, Nino’s mother, who is serving some coffee to her husband, says that it is rare for Nino to be so noisy. Nino hurriedly meets up with Kira. Blushing, she apologizes for making him wait for so long. To her and Sensei’s surprise, Kira angrily tells her that she’s too slow, and she could have made him catch a cold. Soon, Nino just quietly walks with Kira to school. Sensei exclaims for Curly, not to be too pleased with himself. Kira asks how come Sensei can talk and what’s up with that disgusting Kansai accent. Sensei exclaims what he is talking about, it is the influence of Komatsu [<- probably another comedian?]. Narration: “September 20th. In the end, it is messed up start.” In the classroom, everyone is shock that Kira is sitting in front of Nino’s seat. They wonder why those two are together. They also mention about being able to see Bird Girl’s eyes because her fringes are now short. Someone exclaims that she is unexpectedly cute. Another one says that it isn’t true for she still has that bird, and that is quite creepy. At the side, Kira’s friends are looking at them. One of them asks what airplane is Kira riding on, that it is really hard to believe. “Isn’t it so, Yabe?” Yabe just quietly looks at them. While they are all talking about her, Nino is too nervous that she wasn’t able to hear anything that they are saying.

While the rain has almost stop, the trio are sitting at the stairs behind the building. Sensei exclaims that he is very angry and it is all Kira’s fault that Nino’s complexion look pale [from being uneasy?] and why are they eating lunch together. Nino is wearing huge eyeglasses. Ignoring Sensei, Kira asks Nino why she is wearing those glasses, is it decorative, and is she Alicia[?]. Sensei shouts at him that Nino doesn’t like being stared at, and that is why she is wearing those. “Can’t you be at least aware of that?” Nino didn’t answer. Then, she asks Kira if it is okay for him to be always with her, and what about his friends at that side. Kira looks at her. After a pause, he says, “‘Friend’ huh? Ah, compared to that, can you tell me your email address. *Nino surprised* This way, it would be more relaxing. Nino tells him that she only exchange emails with her parents. Just when Kira is taking his cellphone out from his pocket, a paper falls down. Nino picks it up and is surprised that on that sheet of notebook paper, it is written, “Things I want to do before I die” There is an empty ‘bullet list’ below it. Nino says that nothing is written on it. Kira says that he forgot about that, he planned to write something during a boring class. Looking serious, Nino says that together, she will help him think about it, so that it would be meaningful[/sensible] for them to be together. Kira looks surprised by that, and then, he looks a bit thoughtful. Just as Kira turns away to look somewhere else, puzzled Nino asks if he doesn’t have anything that he wants to do. With his face turned away from her, Kira says that of course, he has. Then, Kira notices something and says that it is a rainbow. While Kira happily takes a picture of it on his cellphone, Nino stands up to see it but she couldn’t see it. To her surprise, Kira carries her up for her to see it. This made Nino blush really red. When she is asking him what he is doing, she stops upon seeing Kira’s smile. Kira says, “...everyday that is like a rainbow, gorgeous and colorful life, will or will I not be able to have it.. ..it’s a joke.” Nino seems moved by what he said. The two are interrupted when Sensei goes between them and exclaims, “N—o! You’re so arrogant. What is that ‘it’s a joke’, don’t always stick on to Nino!!” Kira exclaims that he is quite rude, and shut up, parrot. Narration: “—looking at Kira-kun’s eyes made my heart jump endlessly. My feelings are also in a mess.”
Later on, Nino returns to section 1-5. She wonders if it is alright since Kira said that he is going to the clinic. Then, as she passes through the door, someone exclaims, “She’s back, Yabe!” Suddenly, some juice is at thrown at Nino’s sweater. Holding a bottled drink, Yabe slyly apologizes to her for he thought that she is a trash can. Yabe’s other friends are smiling at her over this. Then, Kira returns to the callroom. He is puzzled why Nino is timidly sitting on her seat. He goes to her and asks why she isn’t moving. Then, he notices that there is a juice stain on her sweater. Kira overhears the other students saying that Yabe is a bit mean to do that, and fundamentally, the reason ought to be Kira, and why are they [K&N] together. Kira says, “Okamura, wear this.” To Nino and everyone else’s surprise, Kira takes off his own sweater. Kira calls out, “Hey, Yabe. You truly still like me very much. If you want me to pay attention to you, won’t it be good to just straightforwardly tell me. *casting a meaningful glance.* Brat.” Yabe is furious but before he can go towards Kira, the teacher has already arrived. The teacher tells everyone to sit down and asks what this bad mood is, in the class. Nino just quietly holds Kira’s sweater. Later on, by the sink, Nino is washing her sweater. She is wearing his sweater and Kira is standing beside her. Kira apologizes that it is his fault. Nino says, not at all, and just by washing it, it is clean, and he even lent his sweater to her. Nino is surprised when Kira asks if it made her remember that bad memory. Poking her eyeglasses, Kira says, “Let me say, you should remove these glasses. *Nino exclaims in surprise* ..no, the way I said it is wrong. I won’t want you to miss.. *looks at the other students having fun with their friends* --generally, in this world, ‘happy things’ will follow soon after, and that will far surpass what you can imagine. *removes her eyeglasses* Or, perhaps, I’m the only one who think that. *sad smile* And, this is what you, Okamura, had made me think of.” Blushing Nino looks at him, and thinks of ‘happy things’. Sensei quietly listens. Later that night, while reading in bed, Kira gets a message from someone on his cellphone. He looks surprised after reading it. Then, he looks serious.
Then, it is morning again, Nino hurriedly prepares to go out of the house. She exclaims how could she had overslept and Kira would definitely be angry. Sensei tells him that it is alright, he’ll help her attack him. To her surprise, Kira is not waiting for her. In class, she is sad to see Kira happily laughing together with Yabe and friends. Then, Kira notices her looking at him. After she tries to call his name, Kira says, “Ah- Okamura, even if it hasn’t been long, but I still would want to thank you. There’s no need for you to be with me anymore. In the end, it is quite fun to be with these guys.” Nino is shock and she remembers the hug he gave her at Tokyo Tower. During lunch break, Nino is in a daze. She tells Sensei that how could she say it, she felt disappointed but then, it is also good that they have reconciled. “And, I also kind of regret it.” Sensei looks thoughtful. Flying up, Sensei tells her that her next class is art class, then he’ll go sleep in her classroom. Nino says okay, and this is quite rare for him to say that. In the empty classroom, Sensei flexes his wings and exclaims that guy is quite suspicious, and he will help Nino in searching the truth. So, after some warm-up exercise, Sensei starts to quickly investigate by looking inside a school bag. He thinks that there is nothing out of the ordinary in Kira’s bag. Then, he notices a paper sticking out among the books. Sensei pulls it out, and he looks surprised upon reading it. He is surprised again when some students enter the classroom. It is Yabe and two guys. One of the guys exclaims who would happily go to art class, it is so boring. Another guy asks where Kira is. Yabe says that he is in the toilet. Yabe chuckles and says that he only have to threaten Kira about ‘harming the Bird Girl’ and he’d come back to them. He wonders out loud as to what Bird Girl got on Kira [to make him go with her]. Standing on the chair, Sensei has overheard everything. Later on, in art class, Nino is busying painting on the canvas. She looks out the window to see Sensei holding a piece of paper on its beak. After looking shock about this, Nino goes out of the art class while still holding her palette with some paint on it. At the stairs, Nino exclaims to Sensei as to what had happened. She tells him to hurry for she just told the teacher that she is going to the toilet. Sensei tells her that Kira is protecting her that is why he is doing that. “It is to protect you, Nino, that is why he went back.” Nino looks surprised.
Nino nervously tells him what he is saying, she doesn’t quite understand. Sensei gives her the piece of paper and tells her that guy did say that there are things that he wanted to do. “Then, why do you think that he didn’t simply write it on paper?” Nino opens the folded paper and looks surprised. The first one in Kira’s list of things that want to do before he dies is: ‘I want to become friends with Okamura Nino.’ Sensei says, “It is because being all alone, no matter how much he strived hard, there is no way for him to create happy memories.” Nino quietly looks at this, and then she tightly holds the paper. Sensei calls out to her and she says that she had found it. “I had found a happy thing.” In section 1-5, the other two friends leave Kira and Yabe, because they are going to buy something at the vending machine. Yabe happily tells Kira to look at something that is very popular in the internet, on his cellphone. Kira lamely just says, ya. Then, they were surprised that Nino comes in the classroom, and goes in front of them. Yabe asks Bird Girl, what’s up. Nino sternly tells him, “Give Kira-kun, please give back my friend.” Kira looks surprised. Yabe stands in front of Nino and asks, friend? “What foolish things are you talking about?” Yabe is surprised when Nino makes a pose with her brush and palette with paint. Then, in one quick stroke, Nino paints Yabe’s jacket with her brush. Grabbing Nino’s head, Yabe angrily shouts what she is doing, and to stop. Unfazed Nino keeps on painting. Kira is surprised by what she painted. Standing in front of Kira, Nino exclaims, “Do not be with those guys again!! Quickly come back [to me]! *crying* I..I can create rainbows, together with you.. Kira-kun.” Yabe is surprised over the rainbow painted on his jacket. Grabbing her, Yabe calls her stinky girl, and exclaims for her not to get carried away, and does she really want him to kill her. They were interrupted when they see Kira sobbing. While Yabe is in disbelief that Kira is sobbing, Nino wipes her tears and says that from today on, she’ll be under his care [/yoroshiku]. Narration: “September 22nd: Today, I got my first friend. He is a bit arrogant and he is a bit scary. Occasionally, he would say things that completely lack consideration and he would puts on airs. And actually, he is a crybaby. This person’s name is Kira Yuuji.” After a long pause, Kira sits up and tells Nino, “Hey, let me tell you clearly that just now, it isn’t tears, it’s perspiration.” Nino goes, ‘!?’ Narration: “He is an unfathomable person who can emotionally move me.”
Scans by 離境漢化組.

Vampire Knight [Chapter 79]

2012-01-22T15:55:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 21, 2012

Title: Crack/Crevice. Yuuki’s eyes met with Kaname and she thinks, “Kaname.., my Kaname is there-- *starts walking towards him* If I didn’t quickly go with him..” To her surprise, Zero grabs her arm to stop her. She looks back at Kaname and realizes that it is just Kaname’s double with the use of bats. While Zero tightly grabs her arm, Yuuki says that it isn’t like before when he takes her away with him. She asks him what’s up this time. Kaname then says, “..My pitiful and cute Yuuki..you have become my hindrance.” This surprises Yuuki. Kaname says that he already did things up to this point and she is still unaware that his way of thinking has already changed. He tells her that it doesn’t matter if Zero tells her, for he [Zero] is the one who understands his existence the most. Zero says that somewhere in his heart, he always believed that he [Kaname] will go away together with Yuuki. Yuuki thinks that Zero had prayed for her happiness because unlike Kaname, she knows/understands Zero. Yuuki asks Zero to tell her. Then, she shouts for him to tell her, before, backtracking to say that if he doesn’t want to tell her it is okay. Zero asks Kaname why he let Shizuka out of prison to wreck havoc on the couple vampire hunter. To Yuuki’s surprise, Kaname says that in order for the twins of the family to have a grudge towards purebloods that they can’t break free from. Zero asks why. Kaname says it is to make the twins into living weapons who cannot rest until they thoroughly kill the purebloods. Pointing his gun at Kaname, Zero exclaims why is it them or at least, do not involve Ichijou in it. Just when Bloody Rose seems to get out of control, Yuuki touches Zero’s head to calm him. Kaname’s double already left. Seeing Yuuki teary-eyed, Zero hugs her tight.

In the dorm, Kain and Ruka had appeared in front of Maria who is carrying Hanadagi’s servant. Maria asks what’s up and she heard that they went away with Kaname. As some birds are flying around, Kain says that they are just passing through so please drive those birds of hers away. Ruka asks if that person is Hanadagi’s servant. Maria thinks that if those two are enemies, then it is necessary for her to protect Hanadagi’s servant. Maria exclaims that she’ll do whatever Zero asks her to so she won’t let them harm this person. Suddenly, Hanabusa appears and asks what’s up. Kain says that they are just passing through, together with Kaname. Hanabusa tells them that without their dorm head’s permission, they cannot do as they please even if it is Kaname-sama, or even if it is him. Hanabusa prepares to attack using his ice which made Kain bring out his fire. After the ice surrounds Kain, Kain apologizes to Hanabusa that he didn’t come there to fight him. Kain pulls Ruka to him and uses his fire to retreat. Hanabusa can only shout for Kain to wait/stop. Meanwhile at the Day dorm, Yori is walking outside and wonders about those birds flying around. She is startled when the dorm head also mentions about the birds. The dorm head says that it is too quiet and wonders what had happened. The girls were surprised when class president Kageyama [glasses guy] says that those birds are flying towards the Night dorm. He tells them his observations that the students from the night class are acting strange when they talked with them. Dorm head asks what happened and are those birds that had gathered are allies. Yori says yes.
Then, Yori and Kageyama heard some sort of voice/sound coming from the Night dorm but, the dorm head wasn’t able to hear it. Yori is worried because at this time, actually, they and vampires had barely able to maintain this co-existence thing. In Sara’s room, she exclaims over the disgusting smell, and he ‘ate’ a pureblood on his way there. While Kaname stands behind her, Sara says that even if it is so, it is also not such a big deal for him who had committed a ‘big sin’ which is ‘one cannot turn a human into a vampire when that person doesn’t want to’ and that is greatest crime that the first ancestor had ordered them to never to commit. Even if it wasn’t for them [/thinking of them vampires] but they still respected that rule so right now, they were able to co-exist with humans in this same ground above, even if it is only temporarily. “But, not repeating the war’s disastrous policy before is also a good thing, right..?” Kaname closes his eyes and says that even if it is a bit late than he predicted, it is her turn..even if he hope that she could swallow a bit more purebloods. Then, Takuma appears and tells Kaname that he is really foolish, for it would be okay to just leave the rest to Sara. Takuma also tells him that Yuuki said that she believes in him and because it is him, there is a reason. “If that is so, it is also okay if from today on, you can take her with you and just disappear in some far away place..” Kaname looks at Takuma and mutters his name. Outside, Yuuki is surprised that Zero has hugged her tightly. Then, Zero pulls her away from him. Yuuki[?] thinks that it seems that she understands. “--no, if it is to get to the heart of the matter, it is definitely because of me. For this reason, I will definitely stop Kaname" Zero is thinking, "It isn’t your fault. so do not cry for me--”
Scans by玖玖爱枢♀汉化.

Ookami-heika no Hanayome [Chapter 29]

2012-01-22T15:49:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 21, 2012

Still at the Spring Banquet, Reishou, together with the two Chancellors, listens to a minster who exclaims that the flowers this year is more beautiful than last year, the flowers in the garden seems to reflect the glory and splendor of His honorable Majesty and the flowers are praising his rule.. At the side, Houen is talking with his staff member. Looking at where Reishou is, Suigetsu asks if it isn’t cold there, when it obviously should be a joyful ‘bidding goodbye to winter and welcoming spring’ Spring Banquet. Shuttering, he says Reishou is like a Winter King who can freeze people which made the surrounding ministers unable to disperse away the dark mood that is enveloping them. Irked Houen tells him to quit talking nonsense, and is the wine offering scene already put in order. Suigetsu says yes, there is no problem. He sighs and comments that he hopes the ‘Queen delivering spring’ would go smoothly, and it is only when the ‘spring’ [/flower] has been put in the hands of the king, they could say that their ‘virtuous achievements had come to a successful conclusion’. Houen angrily shouts for him to quit talking. Elsewhere, Yuulin is all dressed up, and she is very nervous. With a twinkle in his eye, Jun tells her that the banquet is progressing smoothly, and right now, finally, it is time for the Queen Consort to make her appearance. Yuulin seriously exclaims, “Yes!” Jun says, “First of all, before the banquet ends, you’ll ride [the carriage] that represents the ‘Spring’s ‘Flower Palanquin’. From the En Pavillion, you’ll encircle the courtyard once before heading to the place where the banquet is held. Then, surrounded by the officials, you will get out of the flower palanquin, and walk several steps towards the king who is in front. After giving the flower, that you are holding, to His Majesty, you are to quickly depart. *rabbit dash* That’s all there is to it! It is so simple, that anyone can do it! The ‘Spring’s Visit’ ceremony symbolizes the end of this Spring Banquet. You should engrave that in your heart.” Yuulin exclaims, “Yes! I will walk properly as if my life depended on it!” Jun says that she answered very well, and it seems a bit different from the usual. Flustered Yuulin exclaims, “Yes! Even if I’m not a professional temporary bride, but I will still properly accomplish the task at hand! Regardless of how much luck I carry, I will still accomplish it!” Puzzle Jun is speechless, and wonders why he felt very uneasy even if Yuulin said that.

In the room, nervously smiling Dai tells Yuulin that it is only work, and just playing along with what’s required to do. Dark Yuulin says that is right, and the men’s work is that kind of job. Dai becomes tense over that. Nervous Dai tells her that it is very normal for a harem to have 200 consorts, and what His Majesty has are only two women surrounding him. There is a scene of two women laughing while clinging on to Reishou. Yuulin replies that in that situation, for the Wolf King, that is something inevitable and normal. “There’s no problem at all! I understand everything!” Dai still looks nervous. Trembling Yuulin angrily thinks that Reishou had made her stay at the harem. “And, he, himself, would go lovey-dovey with beautiful women. *Chibi Yuulin all alone appreciating the flowers* And then, after that, he would have a calm ‘nothing had happened’ expression and act by saying some sweet as honey words. *Reishou telling her that she is most important to him* Flirting with women is that man’s job! His Majesty is a big lewd wolf! *flustered and teary-eyed* Pervert! Lecher-- Too scary- His acting is already brought to the point of perfection- Thus, as a result, I’m moved by it! Darn iiittt..no matter what happens, I will definitely do my utmost best to satisfactory complete this!” Dai still looks nervous. At the banquet, Reishou looks at the two Chancellors and thinks that the cunning foxes are happily gathered under one roof, and this is nothing else but as always, a power struggle and being locked in constant strife. “Saying something like it is a Spring Banquet to praise the king’s flourishing rule.. *smiles* That really makes me want to laugh to death.. This is clearly those men’s playground. –I still, do not want to let her see this-- *remembers flustered Yuulin shouting that he is a big lewd wolf* --I wonder what happened, that she made her say that..? *troubled* ..later on, she shouldn’t be saying something like wanting to quit, and want to go home-type of stuff, right..” Somewhere else in the banquet, Keitaku mutters that the Spring’s Visit is very important and no one is looking forward to that unlucky Queen Consort comes on spring day.
Back at the pavilion, Jun is giving Yuulin last minute instructions about her face being covered that it might affect her eyesight. Yuulin assures him that she’ll be careful. Suddenly they heard a loud sound. Jun, together with Yuulin, goes out and asks what that sound is. One of the men exclaims that it is bad, for the Flower Palanquin that the Queen Consort is going to ride on has toppled over. “Even if no one is hurt, but the palanquin’s poles had been broken!” Jun exclaims what’s going on. The men say that they don’t know for they only left for a while, and suddenly, there is a loud thud. They think that it is either the wind or someone had.. Two shadowed men are watching them. Someone exclaims that they have to hurry and go, or they might not be able to reach the ceremony in time. Yuulin looks surprised as she remembers the mysterious document spreading around about her being unlucky, that she’ll incur disaster thus making the banquet fail. Back at the banquet, Keitaku talks [to himself/subordinates?] that this is the first ‘Spring Banquet’ since the king has ascended the throne, and now the symbolic Flower Planquin has been damaged. “Serving as the ending ceremony, the Queen Consort also didn’t appear. This way, that woman will be thoroughly disgraced. I fundamentally do not want to do this, but it is all the fault of that stupid woman who has no insight at all. If at that time, she made me the one who is in-charge of all this, that mysterious document would merely just a nonsense slander and nothing more. That is until now..” Then, Houen is quite frantic because they don’t know when it will be repaired. Houen shouts that he will adjust the program so that they can buy some time. Then, Keitaku and subordinates approach him. He tells Houen that it seems he is very busy and did something happen at the side of the Queen Consort. Houen snubs him that Keitaku shouts for him not to ignore him. =P While Houen glares at his brother, Keitaku tells him to listen up, if he wants the banquet to end satisfactorily, he has a good proposal. “..It isn’t necessary for you to wait for the Queen Consort. Among the waiting singing ladies, there is a girl whose family is closely related to the Ryu family. So, just use your authority as the person in charge to make that girl as the substitute for the Queen Consort. Then, the closing ceremony can be done. *Houen looks surprised* She’s a very beautiful young lady! If it went smoothly, His Majesty might perhaps had also taken a fancy on her. And during the banquet, she is also standing near His Majesty.”
Realizing that it was his brother who made those girls stay beside Reishou, Houen angrily shouts that Keitaku is doing senseless things again. Keitaku asks what does he mean senseless, rather than waiting for the Flower Palaquin of the lowly Queen Consort, this is a very good way to end the banquet. He thinks that he’ll get rid of that eyesore Queen Consort, and turn this bad situation in a favorable one for the Ryu family’s power[/influence] to go up a notch higher. “This is a perfect stragegy! Even if the ones who thought of it are my subordinates!” Keitaku tells Houen that for their family, the Queen Consort is not that useful. “For things to reach up to this point, you should know yourself as to what you should do.” Houen grinds his teeth and scowls. Suddenly one of Houen’s staff calls out to him that right now, he has a report. “Her Highness, the Queen Consort has already departed from En Pavillion and right now, she is making her round, around the courtyard. She is moving in accordance to the route that you have arranged.” Houen is surprised. Keitaku exclaimed if the Flower Palanquin has been fixed. The staff says no, but rather, she is walking the route which the palanquin should have gone through. Keitaku is shock that the consort is going to walk to that place. Houen tells the others that if Yuulin and others arrive, they are to guide them where to go. Then, Houen glares at his brother and says, “I’m currently working, so those who have nothing to do here, please leave.” Aghast Keitaku is shock for being told to go away. Soon, cloaked Yuulin has arrived. Suigetsu asks her if she is alright, for the courtyard is big, and for a woman, that route isn’t short. Holding a small branch of flower, Yuulin tells him that she is okay for obviously, this is a very important ceremony and it would be very bad if it wasn’t successfully done now. “Even if in accordance to the ceremony that I should be riding on the Flower Palanquin, but what’s really important is for me to pass on to the king’s hand this spring [symbol]..” Houen and Suigetsu are surprised by what she said.
Looking away, Houen says that since it is like that, then there is no problem. “We’ll set up the lanterns used during the day on the pathway, straight towards the king. Please wait a moment.” Suigetsu smiles and says for her walk to be relaxing and pleasant, he’ll make the musicians play some lively music. Yuulin is somewhat moved by their gesture and also by the concern of the other government affairs staff when they ask her if she is alright, and does she want to rest. Looking at the venue from the tree, Dai thinks that is one determined Queen Consort. There is a flashback of Jun shouting that it is unrealistic for her to walk, but Yuulin exclaimed that it is no problem [for her]. Dai thinks that since she is here, what’s left is to give that flower to the king. “But, the moment for His Majesty to take the flower is very crucial. From start to finish, I’m always worried in suspense! Hahaha--” With all the officials gathered at both sides, Yuulin walks in the small pathway lit with lanterns. The musicians are playing some music. Reishou waits for her to arrive in front of him. Reishou thinks that he got the simple report about the Flower Palanquin has been damaged and Yuulin walked all the way there. “But, what could have happened? Are you alright? Yuulin--” Holding a small flower branch, Yuulin smiles and says, “Your Majesty, I’m very sorry that I’m tremendously late. Right now, I’ll present Spring to you. (No matter how many enemies there are, no matter if there are many troubles in the journey [/future outlook], and no matter how many hindrances, I’ve finally arrived!)” Reishou says, “Yes, ..it is truly a long wait! My cute flower, the time when I wasn’t able to see you had been truly long!” After looking surprised, Yuulin smiles and answers, “If I’m a beautiful flower, then wouldn’t I have already blossomed early on in that place? *snapped* Even without me, this banquet is quite enjoyable, right? You big lewd wolf!” Reishou looks surprised. Watching the two, Suigetsu thinks that it is a bit strange, for Yuulin has just arrived and there is some sort of chillness between them even if he couldn’t hear what they are talking about. Sweetly smiling, Yuulin thinks that even if she is quite angry, she can still distinguish between [proper] situations, and she will also maintain her smile. “Ah! As a professional Queen Consort, I only have to think of doing it, and I’m be able to do it! *bows and offers the flower* After giving him the flower, I’ll quickly depart!”
Reishou says, “How beautiful! Compared to the reason why you are angry, I very much prefer to stare at this fresh flower! *Yuulin goes !!?* I think that if I were to just take it, it is quite boring.” Flustered Yuulin thinks, “!? Just quickly take it already! Or else, the banquet cannot end! It is already up to this point, why do side issues keep on popping out!? And, unexpectedly, the hindrance that came towards me is this man! No, I cannot recklessly stumble..” Still with a smile plastered on her face, Yuulin says, “Hahaha, Your Majesty is joking. ..everyone is looking here! Quickly take it already!” Reishou smiles and says yes, for this branch of flower wants the two of them to be alone in properly appreciating it. “Even if it is so, I’ll accept it. *takes the flower branch* Afterwards, you can let out your anger as much as you want.” Yuulin is doing her best to control herself. While Reishou looks at her, she continues to smile quietly. She thinks, “Don’t use such a happy expression *blushing really red* in saying those lines!!” Then, Yuulin leaves. Reishou tells the people there, including Jun, that right now, the flower is already at his hand, and the Queen Consort has already gone her way at the side. “Towards my subjects, this is how the flowers brought spring’s happiness[/luck]. This has been a beautiful day, and the new spring has arrived. Let us all celebrate it together--” The officials including Houen and Suigetsu bow to him. Yuulin takes one last glance at them and thinks that for a second there, it seems that spring has really arrived. Then, she notices the thin mysterious official. She is surprised that the prophecy guy is also there. Narration: “And like that, the crisis has passed, and the Spring Banquet has finally smoothly ended.” Back in the pavilion, Yuulin sighs and says that she is really tired today. She asks her two waiting ladies if they aren’t going to go back to the harem to rest. One of her waiting ladies tells her no, because what happens next is the Flower Banquet with His Majesty and the Queen Consort, only the two of you. “We wish you’ll have a beautiful night.” Looking surprised, Yuulin thinks, “Beautiful night?” Narration: “But, nevertheless, it seems that this emerging Flower Banquet situation still continues.”
Scans by 17kkmh.com and ベーリ猫.

Stardust★Wink [Chapter 37]

2012-01-22T15:46:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 19, 2012

Cover page: “From today on, these three people, Hinata∙Sou∙Anna’s progress is..!? Thank you everyone for the support for these past three years!!” Soon, it is July 29th, and it is already the rewarding ceremony of the Photo Koshien. Hinata and his group won second place. Anna happily looks on as Hinata and others accept the prize. Narration: “After so many things that had happened, the Photo Koshien competition has smoothly ended after three days. At the end, Hinata and others got the runner-up’s prize, while we got the ‘dare to fight’ reward.” At the building, where the contestants are taking a break, Chiaki sighs and says that ‘dare to fight reward’ is basically the same with ‘participation’ reward’. Anna tries to say something about that but Chiaki continues to say that she wished everyone would concentrate in the competition, and even if she has a lot of complaints, but she felt that everyone did their best. Nanoka comments that just as anticipated, Chiaki tends to have a grudge. Hinata lightly knocks Anna’s head and tells her, ‘Good job’. Anna congratulates him for getting the runner-up prize. She exclaims that the pictures of Hinata and others are amazing as if they were taken by professionals. At the side, Chiaki acts like a man when she says that it is amazing to be able to fight in this [competition], and Mari happily says that she is right. Aya and Nanoka look shock by this. [Ah, the two sensei acts like a couple? ^^;] Hinata tells Anna that he isn’t amazing but rather his senpai-s.. Short haired senpai interrupts by saying that he has good insight with photos, and it seems Tokura-kun clearly knows about it [that they are good]. Then, she tells her friend that she doesn’t have enough drinks so they should go get some. The long haired senpai sheepishly look at her friend. Anna and Hinata look speechless at the two as they leave. Aghast, Anna points to his senpai-s, and asks Hinata if those senpai are like that in normal days. After a pause, Hinata tells her that last year, his senpai-s also joined the competition last year, and they also won the runner-up prize. Anna says that it is amazing. Hinata says that they planned on bringing back to Tokyo the first prize this year so, right now, they are extremely unhappy about it. While muttering that it is already amazing to get runner-up prize, Anna says is that so. Hinata says yes.

After a pause, Anna asks him if he is going back to Tokyo. Hinata says yes. Looking disappointed, Anna says is that so. Hinata is somewhat surprised that he asks her what’s with that reaction. Anna says that she thought that since it is summer break, he is going to fly back home with her. Hinata tells her that is impossible because unfortunately, this is a club excursion. Anna says that since it is like that, she realized something.. “Hinata and I are in a long distance relationship!! It is only now that I’ve realized it!” After a pause, Hinata says that is right, he also just realized it now. Anna laments that she thought that they’ll spend the summer vacation together. Sweatdropping, Hinata tells her no, he’ll be back around Obon festival, and upon return, he plans to stay at that side until the end of summer vacation. Anna happily asks if that is true. Hinata tells her that as a homework, she would think of the things they’ll do [for fun]. Anna happily smiles and thinks that is great. Back in her hometown, Anna, Nanoka and Aya are hanging out together. Aya exclaims that it’s finally summer vacation, and it must have been lonely for Anna to not be able to see Hinata when they’ve started to go steady. Nanoka asks Anna if she has already thought of what to do. Anna exclaims that she had thought of a lot of things. “In the end, we have to go see the fireworks. Aside from the fireworks display, I would want to play with some handheld fireworks. And then, we’ll go to the pool or to the beach!! But, I want to slide down to the pool- And if we go to the pool, I won’t get tired of it even after sliding down ten times!! But, it is very hard to give up the beach’s piled up sand- Let me say that I really like being buried in the sand ♪ *Surprised Aya and Nanoka look at her speechlessly* But, we can also play with the inflatable pool at home, that is also so much fun..” Nanoka interrupts by saying that it feels that Anna is a little kid who is excited over some family vacation trip. Anna asks, huh. Nanoka emotes, “‘During vacation trip at some place, papa will accompany you guys!!’ ‘Wee- that’s great!’ *normal deadpan* It’s like that- Let me tell you that your ideas totally doesn’t have any romantic feeling. Right now, you are going on a date with your boyfriend, right? You’re not thinking of wanting to go to some place together with Nagase-kun, are you?”
Looking shock, Anna denies that she is thinking of that. Nanoka asks why she is getting tongue twisted over it. Anna insists that it is true, and swears by it. Nanoka looks at her in suspicion that Anna finally admits that she did thought that it would be nice if the three of them can be together during the fireworks display, just like before. “Hinata said, ‘The two of us will go this year’, but I still think that isn’t what he truly thinks.. Ah, but I know that it is impossible. First of all, I still have not made up with Sou..” Nanoka says that of course, this isn’t about her making up with Sou. Aya says that even if it is Sou who helped them in going steady, she feels that Anna should clearly differentiate that if her feelings with Sou is too good, Hinata would also get jealous. Anna asks about Hinata being jealous..she couldn’t imagine it. Aya happily says that of course, since Hinata is the boyfriend, and the times for the two of them to be alone is comparatively more important than anything else, so she ought to properly cherish it. “First, we have to set the mood. I think that you should write a message to the other party that you eagerly anticipate the time when you’ll go out together. This will lift up the spirits.” Anna looks surprised and says, is that so. Nanoka suggests that Anna tries it out. Showing them what she has written, Anna asks if it is like this. Anna’s message: “I’ve already thought of the places where I want to go. (panda bear; light bulb) Thinking of the dates, in the end, we should go to the fireworks display first (sparkles) I eagerly anticipate it. (star; heart avatar)” Nanoka exclaims, “That won’t do!! Give your cellphone to Nanoka!! *takes Anna’s cellphone* Haven’t you been listening to Aya-chan!?” Nanoka’s message: “On the first date, I hope to be alone with you, Hinata, in watching the fireworks together. At one side, looking up the sky filled with fireworks. *insert imagination scene of Hinata and Anna looking at the fireworks* And, at the other side, deepening my love for you, more than before.. That is what I’m thinking, our love’s flower bud is blooming.” Looking aghast at her cellphone, Anna exclaims, “No no no, this won’t do at all!! I’ll definitely be laughed at. What’s with this love’s flower bud!! Even more than being laughed at, this is very scary[/shocking]!!” To Anna’s horror, Nanoka tells her that she had already sent that message to Hinata-kun. “I’m sorry ☆ =P but couples that started to go steady would send this kind of message, right!?”
Nanoka shows it to Aya who just mutters ya, and she really sent the message. Aya sweatdrops as crying Anna hits Nanoka’s head and shouts, “Stupid stupid stupid, Nanoka you’re stupid- (cries)!!! If you, Nanoka go steady with Kazami-kun, I’ll also make you send a message like that!!” Flustered Nanoka exclaims in surprise and asks what kind of analogy is that, for it is impossible for her and Hinata [to become a couple]. Anna cries and asks what she should do now. Nanoka tells her to relax, for Hinata will immediately reply back. Meanwhile, in Hinata’s school, Hinata is in his art class. He is talking on the phone. The other party on the line says, “Even if it is very good that you are having fun at school but how come you are coming back, only when it’s Obon Festival. I want to see you earlier~~~~” Hinata says that he told her before that he has to finish his school work, and there are a lot of [art] instruments in school so it is more convenient. The other party says, “Poo--” Hinata says that it is useless even if she [says] ‘poo--’. “I’ll go home if I finish earlier than the Obon Festival, and that’s how it is.” After hanging up, Hinata’s classmate asks if it is his girlfriend. Hinata says no, it is his mother. Then, the classmate looks aghast-surprised. Then, the PA [public announcement] system calls out for first year, art section Tokura Hinata, to quickly please go to the faculty room.” His classmate says that it is calling for him, what did Hinata do. Puzzled, Hinata wonders what’s going on. Later on, Anna is sitting in the living room. She is watching the television on today’s horoscopes, and the last one to be mentioned is Pisces. “Be careful of a small [text] message for it will develop into a crisis! The other party’s heart might go far away from you. You can still remedy it by resolving the misunderstanding beforehand. Your lucky item is chewing gum ☆” The news program shows that it is 7:59am. The male reporter says that Pisces people should definitely go buy a chewing gum. The female reporter agrees with him. “Then, hope everyone have a beautiful day.”
Anna looks really aghast and speechless. <- [she is] Pisces. It has been three days since she sent that message to Hinata and there has been no answer. “And, until now, there is still no reply.. Wah—(cries)!!! He has definitely been scared off by that message. *Imagines aghast Hinata saying that message is too much* In the end, I should have immediately sent a message to correct it!! It is now already too late. *takes cellphone* There’s no way for me to keep on waiting for his reply. Even if I’m very afraid, but I should straightforwardly call and talk with Hinata. *the other line rings for a long time* No answer. *hangs up phone* What am I to do, should I send another message? But if this time around, he still doesn’t reply.. *aghast and teary-eyed* I have no way of surviving [it]..” Anna suddenly rushes out of the house. Her mother asks her where she is going. Anna exclaims that she is going to buy chewing gum. Anna thinks that today’s lucky item is chewing gum. “After buying the chewing gum, I’ll hold on to it as a good sign and then, send that text message to Hinata!!” At the hallway, Sou is startled when Anna suddenly came out of her apartment. Sou says that she frightened him to death and what’s going on that she’s so energetic in the morning. To Sou’s surprise, Anna says, “Sou.. *crying* Wah..what am I to do, I had scared off Hinata-!!!” Sou sweatdrops and asks her what happened. Anna tells him that she has sent a joke-type of message to Hinata three days ago, but there has been no answer. “He also doesn’t answer my calls (cries)” Sou asks her what message she sent, and let him see it. Flustered Anna exclaims, “No way! I absolutely cannot show it to you!! If I were to let you see it, I’ll be too embarrassed to death!!” Sou takes out his cellphone and tells Anna that it takes a very serious[/grave] thing to scare off[/shock] Hinata, and it ought to be pretty tremendous. While Sou calls Hinata, Anna is surprised that she can talk with Sou normally, and is this okay. Anna blushes a bit. Sou tells Anna that Hinata isn’t answering the phone. He sighs and says that since it is early in the morning, maybe Hinata is still sleeping, so sending a message is out of the question. Sou takes out a pack of chewing gum from his pocket, and chews a stick. Anna looks surprised over this that Sou asks what is it. Anna says that it is nothing,[but] about that..
Sou asks her if she wants some chewing gum. Anna says yes. When Sou holds out a stick, Anna thanks him. To her surprise, Sou suddenly holds it up, away from her. While Anna is gloomily irritated by that, mischievous Sou tells her that they have already agreed on it, so don’t get angry anymore, he’ll give it to her. While Sou is smiling over that, Anna holds the chewing gum and thinks, “What is this. Why is it that Sou is acting quite normal. *smiles* And it is a bit way too normal.” Then, Sou says, “By the way.. Yesterday, when I called Hinata, he also wasn’t answering it. *Anna looks surprised* Usually, if he didn’t answer it, he will call me back later in the day..” Then, it seems that Sou has realized something that he starts calling someone on the phone again. Anna asks him if he is calling Hinata again. Sou says no, he is calling Mashiro. Mashiro answers the phone and asks what’s up for the sudden call. Sou asks him if Hinata went to his house. Sou darkly smacks his lips [tsk] when Mashiro says that Hinata didn’t come. Sou looks surprised when Mashiro continues to say, “I should say, right now is a very disastrous [serious] time, so how could Hinata come and hang out in my house.” Sou asks him what he meant by disastrous time. “What had happened to Hinata?” Anna starts to look worried. Mashiro says, “Could it be that you haven’t heard about it?” Anna asks Sou what happened and what did Mashiro say. Mashiro says, “Ah, I’m also not quite clear on the details of the situation.. [but] it seems that Hinata has quit [expel/drop out of] school.” Anna looks nervous when tense Sou repeats, “Quit school..!?” At Hinata’s school, some students ask if they had seen that picture. Another student says that they did. A girl says that she really likes Hinata but this is truly too much. A boy says that before, he thought that Hinata’s relationship with that teacher [Mari] is abnormally good, and he didn’t think that they had a relationship. Someone says, ‘gross-’. At the faculty room, the teachers are looking at the computer of what seems to be 4 pictures of Mari going to Hinata. One picture is that night when she went to see Hinata (and Anna), and the other picture is when Mari cried on Hinata when he (and Anna) looked for her during the Photo Koshien. One teacher says that the pictures seem to be uploaded in the school’s computer, and right now, it is quite chaotic. “And it seems that the other party is Kobayashi-sensei, right?” [<- This page notes that it is 2pm so this timeline is off, but it is page 30 of the chapter, before Sou learns about Hinata quitting school.]
Scans by all★wink汉化组.

Stardust★Wink [Beni and Mashiro's Side Stories]

2012-01-22T15:44:00.001+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 18, 2012

Beni’s Side Story: Beni is walking with her two friends. They tell her that her cellphone strap is cute. Beni says that it’s quite good and it is.. She notices Sou walking in the same street that she quickly waves at him, and calls his name. Sou doesn’t look happy to see Beni. Beni happily tells him that it must be fate that she coincidentally met up with him. She asks him if he is going home, and does he want to walk together. Sou refuses. Beni says that it is alright, anyway, they live in the same apartment. Sou says that he is going to meet with someone, and kids should go home together with kids. Then, his phone rings so Sou answers it. Sou bids goodbye to pouting Beni. While Sou walking away, he tells the other party that he will be there soon. Beni’s friend asks her if that is the guy she likes, and what does she like about him. The other friend says that he is indeed handsome but he has a cold-hearted attitude, that he seems scary. Beni looks at Sou’s cellphone and it has the cellphone strap that she gave him before on his birthday. [<- Chapter 5] Beni tells them that what she likes about Sou..is a secret♥♥♥ because if she tells them, everyone would like him♪ This puzzles the others. The end. From the present chapter 37, Sou no longer has that cellphone strap on his cellphone. I wonder if Beni still has a one-sided crush on him.

Mashiro’s Side Story: This one is from what happened in chapter 14, when Mashiro accompanies Sou and Anna to go see Hinata in Tokyo. At the highway, Anna asks about Mashiro not meeting up with Rin, Sou’s sister. Mashiro looks nervous. Sou says that is right, compared to them, Rin ought to be his childhood friend, and they are born in the same year. There is a chart showing that Rin and Mashiro are born in the same year. Then, it is Sou, Anna and Hinata. Then, last, is Beni. Mashiro nervously says, “Rin..she..” Flashback: Mashiro is hanging out in his room with his friends. One of his friends held a letter and exclaimed that it is amazing, that someone still writes a love letter at this age. He liked it because it is more feminine rather than just sending a text message. Mashiro took the letter and told him not to read it for it will betray the girl’s striving hard to get courage [to give this]. Another friend said that he is pretending. The other friend said that Mashiro would once again pretend to understand the feelings of the other party, and make that girl be filled with anticipation, even if he doesn’t want to go steady with anyone. Folding the letter, Mashiro said, ‘even so ♪’ Mashiro is 15 years old then. He likes girls especially girls who like him but he hates being hold down that he doesn’t want to have a girlfriend. Lying down on his bed, Mashiro said that another way of saying it is, he admires girls that he couldn’t refuse them, and all girls are valuable and cute darlings. One of his friends said that it isn’t so. They talked about two beautiful girls who can be their girlfriends but they like Mashiro. One of the guys exclaims that there is still Nagase Rin, who is very beautiful. This surprises Mashiro. They asked him if Rin has not confessed to him. Thinking that even if they are childhood friends [she has not], Mashiro said ya. One of his friends said that Rin isn’t the type of girl who likes Mashiro. Rin gives an aura of ‘guys are all stupid and boring’, and she must have equated ‘Mashiro’ as an arrogant guy. In short, she isn’t like those other girls. Mashiro admitted that he doesn’t like that kind of girl who is not cute at all. His three friends exclaimed that they aren’t forcing him, Rin is just different. Then, they joked around about making a bet of making Rin confess to Mashiro. If Mashiro is able to do it, one of his friends will run around the school in his underwear. The other one will wear a bra, and the other one will run naked.

Soon, he bade goodbye to his friends. Mashiro thought that he doesn’t want to gamble using girls, but the other party is Rin, his childhood friend, and he just wants to pass time so there is no harm in going steady with her a bit. That is right, he always felt empty. He likes girls or logically saying, girls’ love and admiration for him makes him feel satisfied. Young Beni called out to him and told him to chase after Rin, only if he seriously likes her or else, their mother would scold him. Mashiro is irritated that Beni eavesdropped on their conversation. Mashiro told Beni to shut up, and a long tongued brat should just go to sleep. So, Beni whined to their mother that Mashiro is bullying her. The next day, Mashiro waited for Rin to come out of the apartment building, and said that they go to school together. Mashiro wondered why Rin looked surprised when they used to go to school together..when they were kids. Pointing at Rin, Mashiro asked if it has been a long time since they talked to each other. Mashiro laughed it off that it is true, they haven’t been talking to each other. “How long has it been?” Rin replied that ever since girls had been praising him to high heavens that he lost his senses. Mashiro froze as Rin walked away. Mashiro wonders if this is how it is, when they used to be close before, so she has changed. Mashiro told her that he is just being praised, and she is also quite popular with guys. Rin said that she isn’t interested in guys, and it is meaningless if it isn’t someone whom she likes. Mashiro asked her if she likes someone. Rin blushed and exclaimed that it doesn’t concern him, and that thing fundamentally doesn’t matter. As Rin turned around and walked ahead again, Mashiro thought that it is surprising that Rin actually likes someone. Later on, Mashiro would always walk to school together with Rin, and this is noticed by everyone. They also noticed that he would always talk with her that they wonder if their relationship has always been this good. Mashiro would ask Rin to lend her notes, and he would wave at her when she has PE class. The girls wondered if Rin is his true love because Mashiro won’t go steady with other girls who like him. While working in the library, Rin looked a bit irritated at Mashiro who happily asked if he can’t talk with her. He then told her about a ‘tuna belly’ he found, and they look out the window which made Rin laugh. Mashiro thought that he has always been with Rin these past few days, and she hasn’t changed at all, acting cold but suddenly she laughed. He didn’t imagine that Rin had changed and become.. To Mashiro’s surprise, he is reaching out his hand to her. Mashiro laughed it off and pats her head to say that there is dust on her head. After looking a bit serious, Rin thanked him and walked away by saying that she still has things to finish. Mashiro wondered what he was doing when there is no dust on her head. Rin is blushing as she hold her hair where Mashiro touched it.

One day, Mashiro happily greeted her a good morning but Rin didn’t react and just lamely greeted him back. Mashiro wonder why she looked dispirited and she looked pale. While climbing upstairs in school, he is about to call her when Rin lost her footing and fell. At the clinic, Mashiro helped Rin treat her bump on the forehead. She had fell on top of Mashiro but her head somewhat still hit the floor. After apologizing, Mashiro lightly lifted her hair and mentioned that she is acting strange today, and it seems that she is listless. Rin said that it isn’t so, but rather, lately, she is quite spirited because he finally talked with her. This surprises Mashiro. Rin told him that when they were in the elementary, he suddenly stopped talking to her and going to school with her. So that day when he waited for her downstairs, she was quite shock and happy about it. “Because, I like you..” Then, upon seeing his reflection in Rin’s eyes, Mashiro had a sudden urge to touch her. He touches her face and kisses her. He is surprised when Rin asked, “Are you satisfied now? Beni had specially come to tell me that you and your friends had a bet, whether I will confess to you. What did you bet? Is it money? You think that you’re really something, who can kiss any girl who likes you, right?” Mashiro exclaimed that it isn’t so. “No, it’s true that I made a bet with my friends. *Rin took her bag to leave* But, my feelings for you..” He grabbed Rin’s arm to stop her from leaving. Rin coldly tell him not to touch her, and do not talk with her ever again. “I really hate you!” After Rin left, Mashiro fell face down on the bed in the clinic. He gloomily thought that it was bad, for Rin knew. “When did she know about it? Does she ‘like me’ or ‘hate me’? At that time [kiss], why didn’t she avoid it?” Standing outside the clinic, Rin is crying. End flashback. Mashiro gloomily thinks that it is very painful upon remembering his dark past. Anna happily asks him what it is but Mashiro says that it is a secret but what he can reveal is ‘it is darkest beneath the lighthouse’. [<- Out in the open, under the proverbial lighthouse, there is always the risk of missing the obvious in close and plain view. Source: Freelibrary.com] Sou sweatdrops when Anna asks him what that meant. Mashiro smiles at them and says, “It means for you three, Sou, Anna and Hinata, to get along with each other.” Anna looks surprised. Mashiro says, “And one other thing, Beni, that girl, is really annoying. And really, there’s no need to be that nice to her.” Speechless Sou and Anna sweatdropped over that.

Scans by ifilove1314 for baidu

Black Bird [Chapter 61]

2012-01-22T15:41:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 16, 2012

Cover page: “The me who simply SMILES At YOUR side, it would be nice if I could only RETURN to that TIME when [I] don’t know anything at all.” In the living room, Misao is snuggling to Kyo. Then, Kensuke enters the room. Misao thinks that they are at the White Snake’s residence, a clan known for using poisons. Kensuke tells them that he was surprised by the visit, and it would be good if they called first..but then, if they did, they wouldn’t have come at this time [late at night]. Kensuke asks Kyo what happened that is so urgent, and surely, it has something to do with Misao. Kyo says that he thinks that Kensuke can sense that Misao is pregnant. Kensuke says is that what this different feeling emitting from Misao is. He congratulates Misao. To Kensuke’s surprise, Kyo says that congratulation is worthless because if Misao gives birth, she’ll die. Kyo tells him that they’ve read the ending of the ‘Immortal Fruit Record’, and to fear of the Kuzunoha ancestor, it is quite unexpected for the Immortal Fruit to suddenly die upon giving birth, so at that time, they weren’t able to adopt any countermeasures. Kyo corrects himself that no, until now, they do not know if there is a way of stopping that from happened. “Misao, can’t give birth to this child.” Kensuke nervously asks if he is asking him about aborticide. Irked, Kyo says that he knows that this is irrational and cowardly but for him, there is nothing that can replace Misao’s life. “You also don’t want her to die, without a concern, right..!” Kensuke looks flustered that Kyo apologizes. Then, Kensuke asks Misao what she thinks of this, does she think that this is okay. Misao looks flustered then she bends over to hug her belly and apologize. Kyo exclaims that he persuaded Misao, and she doesn’t agree to this. Kensuke exclaims what persuade, and is he unaware of the situation. Kyo shouts at Kensuke and slaps on the table. “..It doesn’t matter!” Kensuke keeps quiet and looks aside. He tells them that he’ll answer them honestly, he is afraid that it cannot be aborted using drugs. Kyo is surprised by this. Kensuke says that even if there is an aborticide, they don’t know if it has an effect on the Immortal Fruit, and the Immortal Fruit’s child. He also tells Kyo that if he makes new medicine, who would test it, and if it is tested on Misao, he won’t be able to predict what change it will cause on her. “I am not beating around the bush. *trembles while gripping his kimono* I really do not know because as anyone else would say, the Immortal Fruit is an unknown living creature!”

Kyo curses in frustration. Kensuke asks if there is any other method that he has thought of. Kyo says that what’s left is to surrender the child. With blank eyes, Misao wonders if they are now going to look for Raikoh. Kyo apologizes for intruding in the middle of the night. He prepares to leave with Misao. While following Kyo, Misao wonders if it is okay for her to continue following Kyo like this, and if she doesn’t do something, she’ll lose her life and Kyo. “But then, if we were to abandon this child, can we really go back to the life we used to live? The price to be paid, is it really only this child--..?” Kensuke suddenly blows a poison needle at the back of Kyo’s neck that he kneels down on the floor. While Misao asks Kyo if he is alright, Kensuke tells Kyo not to recklessly move. To Kyo’s frustration, Kensuke grabs Misao to him. While pinning her to the wall, he hugs her tight. Flustered Misao exclaims what he is doing, and to stop. Kensuke asks her if she doesn’t want to, and if it is someone other than Kyo, she doesn’t want to be treated that way. Misao is surprised by this. Blushing Kensuke lets her go and apologizes. He asks her once again, if this is okay with her. He advises her to think about it again as to what will happen if the child in her belly is no longer there, because what path to take afterwards is something only Misao can determine. “Can you do that!?” Misao looks surprised and flustered. Then, Kensuke gives Kyo that antidote and apologizes for what he did but, Kyo makes a lot of mistakes[/not careful]. Kyo just angrily grabs the antidote. Misao starts to think what will happen if the child is gone. Watching the couple leave, Kensuke says that he didn’t thought that he can still see Misao again..not wanting to see, and cannot see her again.. He seemed to cry as he mutters Misao’s name. In midair, Misao tries to tell Kyo to wait but Kyo tells her not to move around. Then, Kyo’s hand slip that Misao starts to fall down. Kyo immediately catches her and they land safely on the ground. He scolds her as to what she is doing. Suddenly, Sagami and others surround them. Sagami tells Kyo that they knew this is something that Kyo will do that all of them were watching them, though they weren’t able to follow him in the White Snake’s residence. Kyo shouts for them to go back but Sagami refuses. Kyo immediately takes Misao with him and tries to make a run for it. Sagami and others try to chase after them but to their surprise, Kyo attacks them. Even the kids are thrown back that Misao shouts for Kyo to stop, and does he know what he is doing. Kyo attacks Sagami who stands in front of him but Sagami didn’t dodge so his forehead is bleeding. Kyo feels guilty for doing that. Kyo is taken aback when Sagami tells him that even if he sacrifices his own life, he will still stop Kyo.
Kyo falls on his knees and asks Ryo/Sagami to treat it as if they haven’t seen them and surely Ryo knows that the only thing that he longed for, until now, is only one and the same. Misao hugs Kyo’s back. Sagami asks if he thinks that he will treat it as something he hasn’t seen, but rather, he will go together with them. Sagami says that he has no way of refusing if Kyo called him by that name [Ryo], and he had served him for more than 10 years. He tells Kyo that he is well-aware of his deep feelings for Misao, during all those years that he has accompanied him. “My-- My master is only Kyo-sama, I will go together with you.” Then, Houki says that he is the same with his brother, he’ll go with Kyo. The kids exclaim that it is the same with them, for they cannot serve any other person than Kyo. Kyo and Misao are touched by what they’ve said. Sagami says that they are still young, and their parents.. Tarou exclaims that their parents ignore them after their younger sister was born, and don’t treat them like burdens. Buzen says that he is going back to the village for he only works for the ‘main family’, and if Kyo isn’t up to task for this, then fire him as ‘Buzen’. Zenki says that it is the same with him, and in this situation, obeying a bit or more, he will treat it as something he hasn’t seen but, he won’t go together with them, he’ll go back to the village by foot. Then, Kyo slightly bows to his loyal followers. Misao looks at everyone’s expression and wonders why it is all the same expression, the ones who is leaving [home], and the ones going [home]. “They are pretty much looking at the same direction--” Misao remembers Kensuke asking her what will happen if the baby is gone, does she agree to this and being treated like that, other than Kyo. She also remembers Tarou and others shout about their parents ignoring their existence. She remembers Sagami saying before that he won’t let Kyo fall down from the seat as the head[of the clan], and Kyo shouting that it doesn’t matter. She remembers again Kensuke asking if that is okay with her. Misao thinks, “No[/Cannot be]”. After his head wound is bandaged, Sagami asks what Kensuke said. Kyo tells them that they cannot depend on the medicine and he’ll go see Raikoh. Just before they all prepare to depart, Misao tells them to wait. They all turn to Misao who is hugging her belly. Misao says, “I won’t go. I’ll give.. I’ll give birth to this child..!!” Everyone looks surprised. Blurb: “Misao has resolved to sacrifice herself and give birth to the child. After hearing this decision, Kyo and the eight daitengu will..!?”
Scans by 水银工作室.

Kimi ni Todoke [Chapter 64]

2012-01-16T18:25:00.002+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 14, 2012

Cover page: “Ah, look here. I’m always thinking. Always thinking [/concern] of you.” [<- I’m just curious who do you think is that in the cover? It looks like Ayane and Kent to me. ^^;] And, it is already December, and it is snowing. There is a bit awkwardness between Shouta and Chizuru. Chizuru thanks Shouta even if she isn’t quite normal yet. Chizuru says that in gratitude, she will listen to him if he has any problems. Shouta sweatdrops and says that he wouldn’t for she can’t keep it a secret. He tells her that he plans to find the suitable opportunity by himself. When Chizuru wonders if Shouta does have a problem, she meets up with Ryu. They just greet each other with a ‘hi’. Sawako looks at Chizuru and thinks that Chizuru seems a bit better now, from being gloomy before. She had told her friends what happened between her and Ryu before, wherein Ryu said to let it end. Then, Ryu ate the onigiri and they left. Chizuru was in tears before because they seemed like strangers. In class, they were talking to Chizuru about Ryu and that girl who confessed to Ryu. Since Chizuru is spacing out, they feed her food which she ate. Just when Ayane is going to doodle on her face with a marker, Chizuru quickly hits the marker away and it hits someone on the face. ^^; Then, Chizuru and Ayane talk about Christmas is coming soon. Ayane tells Chizuru to shut up when she mentioned about Ayane having no boyfriend this year again. Sawako is happy that Chizuru is cheerful again. Then, Shouta mentions to Sawako about studying after school for the exams. Ayane asks if it is a library date but Sawako exclaims that it is just studying. After Shouta left, Sawako’s friends ask her if she is going to spend Christmas with Shouta. Sawako exclaims that they haven’t talk about it yet. While Chizuru is spacing out again, Ayane tells Sawako that they should, and Sawako should do her best in persuading her father that rather than with her family, she will spend it with her boyfriend this year.

In the library, Sawako is thinking about this, and that the two of them haven’t talked about it. She thinks that they don’t have that mood of spending Christmas together. Then, she remembers Kent telling her to have self-confidence, and other stuff. She is looking at Shouta. When he looks at her, Sawako blushes. This made Shouta blush, too, then he looks flustered. At home, Sawako looks at her cellphone strap, when her father comes in to tell her about plans for Christmas. Just when Sawako is about to tell him, her father says it first that she can go to the Christmas party with the everyone/others, for he is now mature. Sawako’s mother comes in and says that even if he says ‘everyone’, but Shouta is there so, the two of them... Sawako’s father insists that with everyone, she can go. Sawako happily hugs her father and thanks him. Then, her father says that if she is 23 or 25 years old, she’s should spend it with family again. Sawako thinks of being together with Shouta, and would invite him out after exams. Soon, exams are finished. Sawako tells her friends that she’ll go complete her mission. They wish her good luck as Sawako rushes to find Shouta. Sawako calls out to Shouta and says that they go home together. This made Shouta smile. Then, he starts to mention about Christmas. He asks if she is free. Sawako exclaims that she is and she already told her parents that she can go out. “So--” To her surprise, Shouta says, that they spend this year’s Christmas together. “Together with everyone!” Sawako smiles over this and exclaims, “Yes!” Then, she thinks, “Spending Christmas-- together with Kazehaya-kun..!! *her smile freezes* --together with everyone?” Huh?
Scans by 君届同好会.

Kyou no Kira-kun [Chapter 1]

2012-01-16T18:24:00.001+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 13, 2012

There is a male high school student looking out from Tokyo Tower. Narration: “Absolutely not wasting a single minute or a single second, I guarantee you that I will always watch over you [attentively].” Page 1 – 365 Days. Narration: “September 13 (Tuesday). I’ve decided to start writing a diary today. My name is Okamura Nino (16) first year high school student. *In section 1-5, a girl happily chats. Another quiet girl behind her is busy knitting.* I’m a cute and cheerful girl. Yeah right. *focus on quiet girl with long fringes that covers her eyes* I’m only someone who doesn’t seem to exist in the classroom. But..” Then, chatty girl tells the others that she felt uncomfortable with Bird Girl because of that thing, which is said to be a decoration, perched on her shoulder. “It looks too real, that is scary.” Narration: “It seems that I’m also being called as ‘Bird Girl’. And that is definitely, because there is a model bird on my shoulder. *suddenly stands up and takes her bento box* --I almost forgot. I also should go eat lunch. *walking out the classroom to the corridor* In school, there are all sorts of people. There are people who study the whole day. *students studying in the classroom* People who has someone they like that they talk about love and improve themselves. *girls fixing their hair in the toilet* There are people who would do some club activity in between classes. *students playing basketball* And also..” Nino hears someone falling down so she looks out the window. A student exclaims what he is doing [to his friend who is on the floor]. Another guy tells him to shut up for he only tripped him a bit, and who told him to say that they looked down on people. “Right, Kira” A curly haired handsome guy just says, ya. While some girls exclaim that it is Kira, Nino turns to walk away. Narration: “And also, people who doesn’t have any strong feelings for anything.” Behind the school building, Nino puts the model parrot on the stairs. She looks around and thinks that it is okay, no one is around. She smiles and says, “Sensei, it’s okay now.” The parrot spreads its wing and poses. It happily tells Nino that he is still quite good in pretending to be a model bird. Narration: “I won’t have to have a speaking relationship with anyone else. It is okay to only have the parrot (Sensei)” Nino poses and exclaims that Sensei is quite cool. Nino eats her lunch while chatting with Sensei about knitting a scarf for it, and Sensei anticipates it. Narration: “I’ve picked up Sensei, when I was still young. He is a genius for he can understand human language. He is a good guy who usually pretends to stop breathing, to always accompany me at my side. I only need this child and my family, and that is already enough.”

In her bedroom, Nino has just finished writing her diary. While Sensei is sleeping, Nino says, “‘Already enough.’ ... Ever since the time my mother gave me a diary, I’ve started writing it. But, it seems that there is nothing much to write about.. *sweatdrop* If I think about it carefully, there are very few things that I can write about anyone who has a relation with me..” She hears a sound outside so she pulls open the curtains. She looks out to see a woman kissing Kira at the house opposite to hers. Kira turns around to look that Nino quickly closes the curtains. Waking up, Sensei asks Nino what it is. Sweatdropping, Nino says that it is nothing. Narration: “That’s right. My classmate ‘Kira Yuuji’ is also my next door neighbor!! And our rooms are opposite to each other. *Sensei goes back to sleep* But..but, I have never talked with him. Generally, we are like ‘strangers’.” Later on, Nino is called out by her mother and says that she has something important to tell her. In the dining table, Nino looks at her mother in maid uniform, and her glasses father sitting. Nino’s mother is a 35 year old mixed blood who really loves Japan’s cosplay. Nino’s father is a 40 year old ordinary guy. A bit puzzled why they look serious, Nino tells Sensei that the cosplay is really cute. Sensei exclaims that it is beautiful. After Nino’s mother is happy over their compliment, she suddenly exclaims that isn’t what she is going to talk about. Suddenly, her mother starts to cry. While Nino is preparing to eat, Sensei exclaims what happened. Her mother says, “Next door’s Yuuji-kun is going to the grave next year.” After looking surprised, Nino and Sensei think that she is just joking. Nino’s father says that they are not joking. “Didn’t mama have a good relationship with his father? So, not long ago, she learned from his father, about his illness. Even if it is something hard to believe, Kira Yuuji-kun still has one year to live, before he’ll die.” Nino looks surprised and thinks, “Die?” Her crying mother says that she has always been hesitating whether to tell Nino about it or not. Nino’s father apologizes for saying it so sudden. Nino’s mother continues to say, “But, I want you to properly take care of him at school. I think other people also didn’t know about it.” While just muttering is that so, Nino wonders if that guy who regards people lightly, and has that kind of relationship with girls, is going to die.

In class, Nino is knitting again. She thinks that she still couldn’t believe what her parents told her and if she thinks of it carefully, her mother is the type who isn’t normal, and it could be a misunderstanding. Her mother would always go on a wild goose chase. Example 1: Her mother is going to have a duel against some bald guys, she studied kendo and told Nino that there is some monster in the northeast, and she is going to be strong to protect everyone. Looking at Kira laughing with his friend, Nino thinks, “And, what’s really obvious is.. he totally doesn’t look like someone who is going to die soon.” Behind the school building, Nino asks Sensei what he thinks about it. While eating some bird feed, Sensei says that if it about Kira, he doesn’t like him even if his hair is like Torisaki [鳥崎; Japanese comedian]. Since Nino doesn’t know who it was, Sensei puts on some leaf skirt and acts out a skit for her. Since Nino didn’t react to the joke, Sensei scolds her that he has been doing this enthusiastically and it is just weird[/not funny] because he is a bird. To their shock, Kira has seen them. Pointing at the parrot, Kira says that thing is actually alive. Nino quickly grabs Sensei and puts him on her shoulder. After a pause, another girl calls out to Kira and says that she doesn’t want to break up with him, and why is it so sudden. Kira says that it isn’t sudden, and they are basically just fooling/playing around. Then, Kira notices that Nino and Sensei trying to quietly leave. To Nino’s surprise, Kira grabs her shoulder and tells the girl that he is currently going steady with this girl. Then, Kira kisses Nino on the lips. While Nino is stunned, the girl exclaims why it is Bird Girl, and this is such a cruel way of wanting to part from her. Turning to leave, the girl exclaims that she has enough, stupid. After the girl left, Sensei suddenly flies and angrily pecks Kira for doing such a thing to Nino. To Sensei’s shock, Kira says that it turns out that he is really alive. Patting Nino’s shoulder, Kira says, “You don’t want others to know, right? As compensation for a while ago, I won’t tell anyone.” As Kira walks away, Nino’s knees weaken as she sits on the floor, wondering what had happened. Sensei asks if she is alright.

In her bedroom, Nino is still stunned over what happened. She thinks that her mother must have misunderstood about it, because that isn’t the behavior of someone who is going to die soon. Holding a toothpick, Sensei exclaims that he is going to avenge her, and use it to stab Kira by attacking him from the balcony. To Nino’s surprise, Sensei flies away to the next house. Going out her balcony, Nino exclaims for Sensei to wait, don’t, and quickly come back. There is silence so she wonders if Sensei is inside and what is he doing. She imagines devil Kira is happily strangling Sensei, and she must save Sensei. She climbs up the balcony but slightly loses her balance so she falls down on the balcony of Kira’s house. After complaining that hurts, Nino sees Sensei looking out the window door of the balcony. Nino exclaims that it is good, he hasn’t gone in. Sensei says that he couldn’t go in. To her surprise, Kira opens the window door and says that she can’t intrude in, and how she could just go in at will. Nino wonders what to do, and it is very scary. While Kira urges her to say something, Nino looks away and thinks that she is scared of talking with someone. She suddenly stands up and thinks of slipping away. Kira asks her what she is afraid of. Then, Nino looks inside the room to see on the table, some medicine pills in blister pack and a glass of water, slightly spilled on the rim. To Kira’s surprise, Nino blurts out, “Are you going to die?” Nino couldn’t believe what she just said. Kira denies it by saying who is going to die, what is she saying, those pills are just vitamins. While Nino thinks that her mother has really misunderstand it, Kira says that he thought that she came because she has an issue about what happened in the day, and by the way, she is a good girl who would normally wear lipstick, that her lips are cracked. Surprised Nino looks at him and asks if it is okay, someone like her, or, thanks to him, something like that was done to someone like her. Kira looks surprised and asks, “What? Are you thinking ‘it doesn’t matter if someone like me were to disappear’?” Nino says yes, there was a time when she thought that way.

After a pause, Kira partly closes the window door and says, “I actually really detest.. someone like you who pretends to be a pitiful person.” Then, Kira closes the curtains. Nino looks surprised. Sensei flies to Nino and nudges her nose. He tells her that he really likes her. Nino says that she also really likes him. Nino tells herself not to mind what Kira just told her. In school, while erasing the blackboard, Nino notices a small sheet of stickers on the floor. She picks it up and wonders whose it is. Then, she heard her female classmate exclaiming over a missing sheet of stickers. Her friend says that maybe she dropped it. Just when Nino is about to go over and return it, she freezes when her classmate says that maybe it was stolen. The other girl says that sticker isn’t that cute but the girl says that she won’t know about that. Nino holds down the sticker as she remembers the time when a boy is holding a baseball bat, and younger Nino is down on the floor, telling everyone to please listen to her explanation. Then, the girl points at Nino and exclaims that is her sticker. Kira notices the girls shouting at Nino, why she is there, and give that sticker to her. Then, they mutter what’s wrong with Bird Girl who just stares at them while holding the sticker. Kira quietly watches as Nino quickly turns around and goes back to her seat. Then, the girl offers a sheet of stickers to Kira. Kira declines but the girl says that it can be used since if he puts it on his notebook, it will be quite meaningful. Holding some sheets of paper, Nino is bothered that Kira called her ‘someone who pretends to be pitiful’, and even if it is so, she still doesn’t want to have anything to do with anyone. Later on, a male classmate asks where Kira is. They wonder if he went to the toilet and lately, when they turn around, Kira is gone. Then, behind the school building, Nino freaks out for Kira is sitting on the stairs where she usually eats her lunch, he has seized her territory. Kira is quietly smoking when he notices something. Then, Nino wonders what Kira is taking a picture of, using his cellphone. She is surprised when she sees him smile.

Then, Kira is surprised when his friend suddenly shouts that he has found him. Just when his friend is asking what he is doing, Kira immediately exclaims nothing and tosses his cellphone away. The cellphone lands on Nino’s head. When his friend asks what he just threw, Kira insists that it is nothing. His friend drops the topic and says that they are going to eat lunch, and it is his favorite food. Kira tells his friend to go ahead for he has to call someone first. While Nino holding the cellphone, Sensei says that maybe it has something that Kira doesn’t want others to see. Nino wonders if it is some indecent pictures. To her surprise, it is the picture of ants carrying off crumbs of a biscuit. The other pictures are: bicycle by the sea, cat and kitten, butterflies and flowers, some buildings, Tokyo Tower, starry sky, sunflowers, sunset, etc. Nino exclaims that they are beautiful. Sensei exclaims what these are, and the one that he just took are the ants. Kira goes to their side and is shock to see them there. Kira quickly turns around and says that it isn’t his. Nino chases after him and holds his cellphone up. She asks him why he is embarrassed about it, and she thinks that the glittering shine is very beautiful. Kira looks surprised. Nino asks him why there is a picture of Tokyo Tower when most of it is nature sceneries. Taking his cellphone back, Kira says that it is nothing, he just felt at ease when he stays there so he likes it. Turning away, Nino realizes that she spoke too much again. Holding up her face to him, Kira tells her that it would be okay if she just holds up her head and talk like this during normal times. Holding up her fringes, Kira exclaims what with those fringes because upon seeing it, it can infuriate him. Then, Kira is surprised to see a nasty scar on Nino’s forehead, near her right eyebrow. Remembering what happened before, Nino quickly covers her forehead and pulls away from Kira. She remembers some kids, looking down on her = a boy is holding up a baseball bat to hit her, another boy is holding a basketball, and some girls are carrying some rocks to throw at her. Kira asks her what’s up with that scar. In the verge of tears, Nino says that she thought that she was right, but everyone else didn’t think so, and left a mark[/proof that they didn’t believe her]. Kira says, “That also represents that you had fought with that kind of thing before, right? Then, you are truly quite amazing. *Nino is surprised* Ah, right. *takes something from his pocket* I have something good to give you. *sticks something on Nino’s forehead* And, I take back what I’ve told you before. *smiles* Sorry for saying that I detest you.” Nino is surprised.

She looks at the glass door to see what he put on her forehead. It is a sticker saying ‘what you did is very amazing’. Then, she asks Sensei what that guy just said. Sensei says ‘you are truly quite amazing’. She looks at Kira who is walking away. She blushes and thinks that is the first time someone told her that. Back in section 1-5, Kira is resting his head on the table. A girl nudges him and asks didn’t he say that he is going with her to the club. Kira’s friend says that is impossible for Kira is not feeling well today, so how about he goes with her. Continue to knit, Nino looks at Kira, but dismisses ‘not feeling well’ as no big deal. Then, she notices an ant on the floor. She goes to pick it up and move it out of the way, when Kira’s friend is about to step on it. Nino quickly pushes him away to save the ant. The friend angrily asks Nino what she is doing for that hurts. Nino is in a pinch as the friend shouts at her if she has some hatred towards him and quickly speak up. The girl beside Kira says that Yabe and Bird Girl are in a quarrel. Nino tries to apologize but Yabe angrily shouts, “Ha?! I can’t hear you. You are really disgusting. I really hope that you quickly just die!” Nino is somewhat surprised by this. They were all surprised when Kira tells Yabe not to casually tell others to go die. Yabe is taken aback upon seeing Kira sitting up and looks very serious. Yabe says that Kira used to always say that, too. Kira tells him to shut up, and don’t say ‘go die’, who does he think he is. Yabe asks if he is saying that Bird Girl is much better. Kira says better, and does Yabe know what other people call him, ‘Kira’s shit’. While Yabe looks surprised, the others ask Kira if that is a joke, and how could he say that. Kira says, “Anyway, this kind of thing.. you guys are also.. *looking thoughtful* I’m also..” Yabe suddenly punches Kira and continues to hit him as the girl tries to stop Yabe. Nino clenches her skirt and thinks that it is her fault.

Later on, the students say that they [Kira & Yabe] weren’t suspended but it seems that they were made to go home first. Another student says that lately, Kira is quite cruel, and never before had he thought of Kira being a drag, and always treating them like a fool. Remembering Kira’s expression, Nino thinks that it totally isn’t like that, and why did he have that kind of expression. Sensei quietly watches her. Soon, the teacher arrives and tells everyone to sit down for class to start. Just when everyone is sitting properly, someone says, ‘I won’t want to die’. A student asks if the teacher heard something. The teacher asks if she heard him fart. Nino looks at Sensei who says, “Darn it~~~ ‘I don’t want to die.’” Nino is shock that she quickly hides Sensei using her notebook and asks how he could say that. Sensei tells her that when he flew to that guy’s balcony, he heard him say that, so he didn’t go in. “At that time, that guy is crying *in bed*” Nino felt teary-eyed as she remembers all those times she has seen, and with Kira. To Sensei’s surprise, Nino says that she is filled with enthusiasm. When the teacher calls out to Nino’s name for attendance, Nino suddenly stands up and exclaims, ‘Pah!’. While everyone is surprised as to what’s going on, Nino quickly runs out of the classroom and wonders what’s up with her. At the observation deck of Tokyo Tower, Kira is sitting on the floor. He is surprised to see Nino standing in front of him. Nino exclaims that is great that she found him. “It seems that you weren’t at home, so I thought of the pictures..” Kira asks her why she came. To his surprise, Nino says, “It is because you have only one year, before you’ll die.” Kira looks at her then, looks out the window. He tells her that he is at ease when he is there looking at the moving city, compared to staying all by himself at home. “But, people who look out from here, and my [imminent] death, totally have no relation to each other. –Upon learning from the doctor that I’m going to die soon, it seems that everything that I had done [/established] is all insignificant. At the same time, I also became aware of ‘loneliness’. *covers eyes* ..I don’t want to leave everyone and become all alone. But, being together with everyone, I became lonelier. *hands trembling, and starts to cry* What is the best thing for me to do? ..I don’t want to die. I don’t want to die. I don’t want to become all alone..” Nino becomes teary-eyed. She thinks, “I know.. Being all alone by oneself is very lonely. Terrifying. *remembers past self* Something hopeless..” Sensei is puzzled when Nino suddenly turns around and walks towards a couple with a small child. The mother holds out a pair of scissors and says that she is now going to cut open the child’s favorite snack. Nino asks if she can disturb her a bit. Nino goes back to Kira and tells him to lift up his head.

As Kira looks at her, Nino says, “Ever since before, I’m afraid of looking straight at someone so I’ve obstruct my vision. But..” Kira is surprised when she cuts her fringes a bit so that her eyes can be seen. While Sensei freaks out, Nino holds out her hand to Kira and continues to say, “I will always be by your side. Always until you die. *teary-eyed* No matter what you say, I absolutely won’t let you be all alone. *Kira still looks surprised at her* Isn’t that so, Sensei, you also accompany and play with him, right?” Sensei exclaims why, he doesn’t like that guy. Standing up, Kira says that it seems like a marriage proposal. Nino blush over this. Furious Sensei calls him a brat, and not to move an inch. Nino is surprised when Kira holds her outreached hand then hugs her tight. He says, “Thank you.” While Sensei is screaming what he is doing, Nino somewhat hugs Kira back. Narration: “Although, right now, I still don’t understand what this feeling is. But, I want to be with him in passing through these 365 days. I want to keep on living together with him.” Blurb: “Upon learning Kira’s loneliness and pain, Nino, who doesn’t want to get involved with people, had broken out and committed herself. With fate guiding the way, these two will now start their 365 days!!” Scans by 離境漢化組.

Chitose, Etc. [Chapters 35-37]

2012-01-16T18:22:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 12, 2012

In the clubroom, Amika gives Chitose the data that she has already gathered, and asks what else she is going to do. Chitose tells her that nothing much is done except for data gathering for the activity. Chitose tells her about the other stuff in the clubroom. She can’t help but admire Amika’s beauty, and how cute she is. She also can’t help but wonder how come she has a good relationship with that weird Subaru. Midoriko asks Amika if Subaru is coming. Amika didn’t know for he left the classroom, earlier than her. Chitose is very happy with herself because she has already told everything to Yuki so there’s no need for her to be afraid of Subaru. Then, she notices that Yuki is also late. Yuki arrives late and tells the others that he met Subaru who won’t be coming because he has work to do. Yuki looks at Saaya who is working on something with Shun. He calls out Saaya and the two went out for a while. This somewhat puzzle Chitose and Shun. Outside, Yuki tells Saaaya that Subaru is Natsume Takeru, Misaki’s younger brother. Flashback: An hour ago, at the roof, Yuki wanted Takeru to explain things clearly to him. Takeru said that he has nothing to tell him. Yuki commented that Takeru gives a different vibe that he totally didn’t recognize him. Takeru said that on contrary, Yuki and Saaya are still the same that he quickly recognized them, and he lost his Kansai accent because of work, but he uses it when at home. Yuki told him that his sister Yuka is going out with his brother. Takeru says that he knows and it is from his brother that he knew that they are studying in this school. Flashback 2: At home, Yutaka is talking with Takeru as to which high school he would want to go. When Takeru mentioned his interest with Haisawa High, Yutaka told him that Yuki and Saaya are studying there. Takeru asked him how he knew this and that is when Yutaka admitted that he is going steady with Yuka. Takeru remembers that Saaya is also an actress. To Takeru’s surprise, he learns that Saaya and Yuki are no longer going steady. They broke up and found their own respective new lovers. Takeru couldn’t believe that they hurt his brother Misaki and now, they found other lovers.

He asked Yutaka not to tell Yuka about him for it will be troublesome because as actors, they wouldn’t want the people they are familiar with before, to know about it. Yutaka believed Takeru and assured him that he won’t tell. End flashback 2. Takeru told Yuki that he wants to know their current situation, so he stealthily came in the school using a senpai’s uniform. Takeru said that upon seeing him lovey-dovey with his new girlfriend really puts him in a bad mood. Looking calm, Yuki asks if he has been doing those things to Chitose because she is his girlfriend. Takeru admitted that is true. Yuki asked if he hates them that much. Takeru said that it can’t be hate because Misaki didn’t die because of them, but still, he is very angry especially at Yuki, who is Misaki’s best friend, since he secretly went lovey-dovey with the girl that Misaki likes, behind his back. Looking guilty, Yuki apologized for that. Takeru exclaimed over his frustration that his brother died at age 10, and they are living a carefree happy life. Takeru shouted doesn’t he pitied him [Takeru] who lost his brother. Yuki tried to say that he did think of that but Takeru continue to shout that he wanted them to taste unhappiness. “Give Chitose to me! This way, I can forgive you for what you did to my brother.” End flashback. Walking home, Yuki tells Chitose that Subaru is Takeru, Misaki’s younger brother. He used to be cute then that Yuki wanted him to be his own younger brother. Chitose also find him cute from Yuki’s story, and she wondered how come that kid turned out like that. Yuki informs her that he already told Saaya but she doesn’t have much impression of Takeru since Takeru tends to leave whenever Saaya is near them before. Yuki tells Chitose that it seems that Takeru couldn’t forgive them[/him] for betraying Misaki and living a happy life, especially since he is having a good relationship with Chitose.
To her shock, Yuki tells her about Takeru’s proposal that he’ll forgive him if he gives Chitose to him. Yuki assures her that is something that he cannot do so he refused Takeru. Chitose tells him that Misaki himself has already forgiven him so even if Takeru couldn’t.. Yuki says that is right but he understands why Takeru is thinking that way. He apologizes to Chitose that she became Takeru’s target because of him. Chitose happily tells him that it is alright, she’s fine. Chitose asks about asking Yutaka’s advice on how to deal with this. Yuki says that Yutaka would definitely not understand Takeru’s feelings towards them, and he doesn’t want them [Yutaka and his sister] to be worried so, he decides to keep this a secret from the others. Chitose asks if Takeru hasn’t gotten over Misaki’s death. Yuki doesn’t think so but rather, the anger revived upon seeing them. He says that this is painful, and he doesn’t know how to ease it up for Takeru, but still, he couldn’t give Chitose to Takeru. Chitose looks flustered for Yuki. At school, in the library, Yuki is called by Amika. Yuki asks if she is going to borrow a book but she says that she came in because she saw him inside. After a pause, Yuki says that she has a good relationship with Takeru. Amika tells him that she has few friends because she is always absent because of work so she is quite close with Takeru. She says that even if Takeru is a guy, she thinks that he is her intimate friend. Yuki asks her if Takeru mentioned to her about knowing him [Yuki] early on. Amika says he did, that Yuki and Saaya are his hospitalized brother’s friends, and it seems Takeru is angry at them. Yuki comments that they are like brothers before, and right now, he is loathed by Takeru. Amika apologizes for the age between Takeru and Misaki is quite close so their feelings are very deep. Yuki tells her that there is no need to apologize for that. To his surprise, Amika holds his hand and says that she really likes him.
At the clubroom, Midoriko suggests that they have a welcome party for the newcomers. She asks where they would want to go. Kanata happily approves of it. Takeru is a bit hesitant about it because he has work on school days off. Midoriko suggests that they do it during a club activity day. Takeru agrees on that. They discuss on what to do on that day like karaoke or bowling. Amika says that she wants to see a panda. Chitose, Midoriko and Kanata squeal about wanting to see a panda, too. Shun seems okay with it, and comments that they look very excited. Saaya is a bit okay with it. Midoriko asks him to go ask his manager when they are free. Takeru and Amika tell her that they are free today. So, the three happily squeals that they are going now, and Shun thinks that they are noisy. At the zoo, the three and Amika are really happy to see the panda. As they go out, Shun asks where Saaya is. Midoriko says that Subaru is also missing so maybe they took a walk. Somewhere in the zoo, Saaya tells Takeru that it is the first time for them to be alone. She says that before, he doesn’t want to go near her, and he must be shy that he always sticks with Misaki. Takeru calls her stupid for it isn’t like that. He says that he isn’t good at dealing with girls like her, and he doesn’t like her as some ojousama[/milady] who is cute, and sick that everyone ought to dote on her. Irritated, Saaya smiles and thanks him for still admitting that she is cute. Takeru thanks her because after seeing her on the television and learning that she is acting, and he has been discovered by Amika’s manager, he thought that if Saaya can do this kind of work, so can he, and he can be a better actor than her. Before, he only thinks of it as work, but now, he enjoys it. Saaya got irritated since Takeru is implying that her acting isn’t that good since she only treats it as work. Saaya changes the topic to ask him to stop tormenting Yuki. She tells him that she was the one who confessed and break the balance between them so why isn’t he after her instead. Takeru says that it doesn’t matter if she confessed or liked Yuki, the thing is Yuki consented to it thus he can’t forgive him for that. Saaya exclaims that even so, don’t do such a foolish thing of taking Chitose away from Yuki. Takeru shouts back that this has nothing to do with her, and it is something between him and Yuki.
Just when Saaya is about to protest, Midoriko and others had found them. Midoriko scolds them for walking on their own since they have to find them. Saaya apologizes and says that it is because there are many people inside the panda center. While Midoriko and Takeru are talking about the panda, Saaya tells Yuki that Takeru is stubborn for he won’t listen to what she’s saying. She was hoping that he’ll cool off by hating her. She advices Yuki not to always stay away from [/not mind] Takeru since that guy has chased after him to that school and Takeru is involving Chitose in it so he isn’t the cute Takeru from before. Yuki says that Takeru is still Takeru. Yuki becomes nervous when the others notice that Chitose and Subaru are no longer with them. Yuki tries to call Chitose on the phone but she isn’t answering. He decides to go and look for her. Kanata says that there is no need to be that nervous. Midoriko just says that Yuki is being overprotective since Chitose seems like a child compared to others. Shun asks Saaya what she and Yuki are talking about because it seems serious. To Shun’s displeasure, Saaya dismisses it as something about the hospital, and it is not important. Elsewhere in the zoo, Takeru has held Chitose’s hand and ran off with her. As Chitose catches her breath and frees herself from him, Chitose gets her cellphone to call Yuki. Takeru says that it is boring to walk as a group. When Chitose protests that it is his and Amika’s welcome party, Takeru says that he only wants to be alone with her. Chitose exclaims for him to quit doing that for she knows everything and he is doing this as revenge. Chitose is puzzled when Takeru says that it isn’t like that, maybe midway his revenge or something, but in the end, he came to like her. Takeru says that he was waiting for Yuki then, during V-day but he met Chitose instead. He felt good when she gave him that choco and thanks him for his help. He got furious at Yuki upon learning that Chitose is Yuki’s new girlfriend, and seeing them lovey-dovey outside the gymnasium. From his senpai who is in the student affairs, Takeru learns that Chitose transferred school from Okinawa and she is Mikami Yui’s younger sister. So, he auditioned for ‘level eleven’, and he thinks that it is fate for him to pass it. Thus, he decided to go to Haisawa High to take her away from Yuki. Chitose looks surprised over his lengthy confession.
Takeru also tells her that what he said before isn’t a lie, he got in the club because of her. He still doesn’t know if he truly likes her but he can’t get her out of his mind. Chitose asks if he is still acting. Takeru exclaims that he isn’t, and forget it if she doesn’t believe him. Suddenly, Yuki comes between them. He asks Takeru to please don’t involve Chitose in this for it has nothing to do with her that Takeru hates him. Takeru says why he has to listen to him. Then, Takeru just leaves. Yuki asks if Chitose is alright. Chitose says that they only talked. Chitose wonders if what Takeru said a while ago is true, and if it is, it might be because of her that Takeru would hate Yuki more. Then, at the clubroom again, Chitose and Yuki had finished eating the bento that Chitose made. Chitose wonders if she should tell Yuki what Takeru told her but then, she doesn’t want to increase the trouble between them. Then, Amika comes in and says that she is looking for Yuki, and she didn’t know that Chitose is also there. Since Amika has something to consult Yuki about, Chitose decides to leave. Just when she is already walking away, Chitose wonders if that consulting Yuki is actually a confession. Chitose quickly goes back and decides to eavesdrop. She mentally apologizes to Amika and if it isn’t a confession, she will quickly leave..but then, what if it is a confession. Chitose overhears Amika telling Yuki that she doesn’t want to go home because she couldn’t get along well with her stepmother. Her father married again, and she is mixed blood. Her mother is from Switzerland. They met each other when her father is still studying, and he went on a Scandinavian tour. Their age gap is huge but they fell in love and got married. They live in Japan but couldn’t overcome the culture gap so they divorced and her mother went back to Switzerland. This happened when she is still three years old, and she lived with her father and grandparents. Two years ago, her father married again and since they aren’t related, her stepmother couldn’t get along with her and she has no way of loving her. Their feelings for each other are mutual but lately, when her father isn’t around, the stepmother starts to hit her. Amika starts to cry over this. Yuki and eavesdropping Chitose are surprised. Amika starts to tell him about the physical abuse that has been inflicted on her and since her father left today, she would be alone with her stepmother again. After showing her injuries, She says that she is afraid and asks Yuki to save her.
To their surprise, Chitose dashes in the room. While Amika looks aghast, Chitose apologizes for eavesdropping and says that they should quickly do something. Chitose asks her if she has told her father or grandparents about it. Amika sweatdrops and says no, because it isn’t important. Chitose shouts what she is talking about, this is abuse and it is necessary to discuss it with an adult but then, who is the best person to talk this with, home room teacher, guidance counselor or police. To Amika’s shock, Chitose says that she is calling a youth consultation center hotline for help. Finally, embarrassed Amika confesses that she has been lying. She apologizes and quickly leaves, leaving stunned Chitose and surprised Yuki. To Chitose’s surprise, Yuki tells her that he felt that Amika has been lying. After thinking for a while, Chitose decides to chase after Amika. Chitose asks her if it was really a lie and there is really no problem with her stepmother. Amika apologizes for she doesn’t have a stepmother. It is true that her parents divorced but her father didn’t remarry, and the burnt marks are from an accident. Chitose is relieved over this and asks her why she lied. Amika didn’t answer so Chitose suggests that they go have a talk at her house which is nearby. She would also want to know more about Takeru. Touched by Chitose’s actions and words, Amika agrees. In her room, Chitose says that it seems that her brother went out. Amika apologizes for that strange lie and she thinks her acting isn’t that good since Yuki has seen through it, and people say that she is just a pretty face. Chitose nervously smiles and asks again why she lied. To Chitose’s shock, Yuki says that she plans to seduce Yuki, and after saying that she won’t go home, she’ll ask him to go to the hotel with her. Chitose asks if she really likes Yuki. Amika says no, she just wants Chitose to leave Yuki because Subaru likes Chitose. She apologizes for this, and says that she has always been striving hard in doing this.
To Chitose’s shock again, Amika tells her that she would go near Yuki, occasionally touch him and even confess at the library but Yuki just thanks her for the confession..and that felt like an idol touching a fan’s hand. Chitose asks her if Subaru asked her to do this. Amika says that she is doing this on her own free will, and whatever Subaru wishes, she will make it come true. Chitose asks her if she really likes Subaru. Amika says that he is her beloved friend. She doesn’t want a romantic love that will end someday just like what happened to her parents. She wants them to be together forever, not as lovers, but as friends. Blushing, Chitose comments that for Amika, Subaru is someone very important to her. Amika smiles and tells her that she was being bullied during junior high. Because of her showbiz work, she wasn’t able to blend in with the others and, there are students who don’t like her. But, Subaru who just transferred helped her out. Subaru scolded the girls that bullying is something a retard would do. It has nothing to do with him but seeing it puts him in a bad mood. If they got a problem with that, then they can go at him and fight. End flashback. Amika tells Chitose that Subaru used his Kansai accent to angrily rebuke those girls. It was very daring that it shocked those girls. And since then, Subaru is someone very important to her. Chitose asks her if it isn’t hard to watch with open eyes for Subaru be in love with someone else. Amika smiles and admits that it is true, even now. She would be lying if she says that it isn’t true but it doesn’t matter, she will strive hard and bear with it. Chitose tells her that even if they become lovers, it doesn’t necessarily mean that they will break up. Amika says that of course, it is impossible for it to be 100% chance of breaking up, but she doesn’t want to gamble on it. “No matter what, I want to stay at his side.” Chitose looks awed by Amika’s resolution.
Scans by defer for jmydm.

Kanojo wa Uso wo Aishisugiteru [Chapter 26]

2012-01-16T18:20:00.003+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 11, 2012

[Free Talk: Chapter 25 can be read at ankemaybe's blog .]

Looking at her posters, Riko ponders on saying something as ‘life-changing’ but what exactly has changed since after all, there is no life that doesn’t change. And, even if that is so, why does it feels that there’s no way out, as if something has changed. Meanwhile, Aki is playing with his toy helicopter by the esplanade. He thinks that he started dating Riko because he wants something that isn’t related to music, and he lied to her because he wants to have bonds with her that isn’t related to music. “..It’s truly strange for right now, what I had wished for had come true.. You will perform the music that Shinya composed.. But, I couldn’t put myself at ease..” At night, Shun and Shinya are doing some radio disc jockey job. Shun introduces himself as the host of ‘All Night Japan’. He notices that Shinya is looking uneasy that Shun laughs and introduces himself again. Shinya asks why he is laughing. Shun tells him that before they talk, he must introduce himself first since they are doing a radio broadcast, and the audience couldn’t see him, hence, they don’t know who he is. Then, Shinya introduces himself. Shun starts laughing again by saying that Shinya has been strangely nervous since he was in the lounge. Shinya denies it. Shun says that their honored guest today is Shinya whose first work garnered a lot of publicity. Shinya says that is right, this is a publicity tactic or else, he wouldn’t have been in a radio program with Shun. Shun asks if he is more enthusiastic about this than CPlay’s new song. Shinya says of course. Shun exclaims hat he [Shinya] better not suddenly leave CPlay. Shinya tells him not to say that or else, people would suddenly rush into that place, and it won’t be easy for him to become Shun’s rival. Shun asks him about how that bass part is performed. Shinya says that compared to that, he wants to know about the thing between Shun and Mari. Shun tells him that is quite a boring thing, and they just have a working senpai-kouhai relationship. Shinya says that if it is true, then it will be quite interesting but regretfully, it isn’t like that. CPlay’s manager nervously mutters that they shouldn’t recklessly say things.

Shinya asks Shun what type of girl does he like. Shun says that during high school, he likes a girl who wears glasses. Shinya asks if it is someone in the same year. Shun says that she is his class president, and he thinks that his classmates know about it. Then, Shun laments that he thinks that high school classmate could be listening to this program. Shinya says that from what he is saying, was it an unrequited love. Shun says yes, and at that time, he had a girlfriend. Shinya says that he is that kind of guy. Shun says no, it is because that girl really, really likes a guy who doesn’t have any future prospects. Realizing something, Shinya says is that so. Shun laments that he is now in a sad mood. Shinya comments that he didn’t expect Shun to be pure-hearted. Shun asks if this is what being pure-hearted is. The staff laughs over this. Then, Shun promotes Mush & Co.’s music since they are talking about pure-hearted. Shun asks if it is too sudden for he had prepared this ahead. Shinya says that he only forces the change of topic, and he [Shinya] intensely want to change the topic. Looking outside the booth, Shun says that actually, the lead singer of Mush & Co. also came here in the broadcasting room. Riko timidly waves at them. While Riko is bowing to them as an apology, the they say that Riko can’t participate in the program because she is still a minor, 16 years old. Minors cannot work from 10pm – 5am. Shun says so, Riko only came there to have fun [with them]. Shinya exclaims that no way, she is still 16, and what kind of fun will they do there at the middle of the night. Looking at blushing Riko, Shun asks won’t her boyfriend be angry. At a yakitori [barbecue] restaurant, Aki grumpily says will be angry, very angry. The radio program is being tuned in at the restaurant. Aki is eating with the other CPlay members. Kaoru asks Aki if that glasses class president Shun is referring to is Nagahama Miwako. Aki says it ought to be. Teppei asks Aki if it is Miwako who asked him [Aki] out during the school field trip. Aki says ya. Aki is surprised when Kaoru asks if Shun knew that Miwako of Hearst records, the one in charge of Mush & Co, so she ought to be currently at that radio station.

Back at the station, Shun says that they’ll continue to receive mails from the audience about Shinya. Watching outside the booth, Soichiro asks quiet Miwako if she used to be a class president. With crossed arms, Miwako says that Shun is like before, always saying something as if it is true but he’s only teasing people. Takagi laughs and says that Shun was at a loss at the discussion room. Flashback[?]: Miwako gave Shun her business card, and asked if Shun still remembered her as his classmate during second year high school. Shun asked her why she is speaking to him in a polite manner. Miwako told him that it is because he is her senpai. Shun said that he is now her senpai, and during high school, he used to be ordered around and driven around in circles by her. Miwako said that 7 years had passed, things changed so she isn’t some fool who is all giggly and happy because they are classmates. Shun replied is that so. Later on, while sitting on the chair, Shun held out a 100 yen bill and said, “Hey, Nagahama, go buy me a pack cigarettes.” Irritated Miwako stared back at him and didn’t react. Shun looked at her then burst into laughter that it is so funny. End flashback. Reading from a script which will introduce the reading of mails, Shun says that they’ll now listen and enjoy the music together. Shinya introduces ‘Tomorrow Still’, Mush & Co.’s debut single, that will be sold next month. Riko blushes as their single is being played. The staff enters the room and says that the number of mails coming in is quite astonishing. Shinya leans on his chair and looks at Riko. He tells Mushroom to come in. Riko is surprised and exclaimed that they are currently broadcasting. Shinya stands up and pulls Riko inside. Reading a paper, Shinya says that while broadcasting a song, they won’t be heard even if they talk. To Riko’s surprise, Shinya bends to the microphone and shouts, “Shit! *leans back in chair* See, whatever is being said, the audience won’t hear it.” Riko becomes nervous for it is CPlay’s Shun. Sweatdrops, Shinya says ya. After letting out a laugh, Shun asks Riko if the lyrics she wrote is about her boyfriend. Riko looks surprised.

Back at the yakitori restaurant, after Shun mentioned about listening to the music, Aki quickly stands up. He tells the others that he is going to buy a pack of cigarettes. After he left, Teppei asks if Aki has started smoking. Kaoru says that Aki is running away, for he doesn’t want to listen to this song. Standing outside, Aki looks flustered. Narration: “Seven years ago.. I’ve decided not to ride on this train, but you rode on it. Where that train goes, where it would reach, where it will stop, all of this, I clearly know. I clearly know that in case one sits on to ride that train, one won’t be able to get off it again. And, when one decided to get off, you’ll discover your original aspiration, course of events, right now[/present].. you have been confined here in this train. Hey! Mush, right now, you only still have not noticed it yet.” Scans by defer for jmydm

Bokutachi wa Shitte Shimatta [Chapter 55]

2012-01-16T18:17:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 9, 2012

Narration: “Girlfriend’s house.. or my house.. This is a problem.” During PE class, Yukito is sitting at the side with Abe and Friend [I don’t know his name ^^;]. While the others are playing various sports, Abe says, “Hey-- Kaji Yukito-kun, your expression looks so serious. This is a rare PE class that has become a free activity— Don’t you want to play basketball?” Looking at Kotori playing volleyball, Yukito just says, “Ah- if there is no place [to do it], what should I do?” His friend asks him what he is talking about, and what place. Blushing, Yukito says, “Ah.. That.. H..” Scribbling on his small notebook, Abe mutters, “Yukito’s brain is filled with H stuff, that he won’t even play basketball.. record..record..” Embarrassed Yukito exclaims for him to please don’t record that. Laughing, Friend says, what, he [Yukito] still hasn’t done it, and what he is worrying about. Yukito tells his friends that his brother has been staying in their house a lot lately, and it is problematic since his brother might come home at any time. Abe says that won’t it be a problem if he just locks the door. Yukito tells them that they don’t know how scary his brother is. Friend says that Yukito’s brother would definitely bother them, since he has a wicked interest [of teasing Yukito]. Yukito comments that he [Friend] also thought that. Abe asks him about doing it at his girlfriend’s house. Yukito says that Kotori also has an older brother. Writing in his notebook, Abe mutters that the two Kaji-s’ older brothers are troublesome, record, record. Abe asks him about going to a love hotel. Embarrassed Yukito exclaims that he doesn’t have money for that, and Kotori would definitely run away. Abe and Friend happily offer to lend Yukito their rooms. Leaning back, Yukito asks if there is no other way. Abe protests if he will do it. Friend exclaims that he hasn’t even said that he is going to peep on them. Then, Yukito notices that Kotori is looking at him. She happily waves at him. Yukito blushes. He quickly exclaims for his friends to quickly look something up there. As they look and asks what it is, Yukito happily waves back at Kotori. =P Using his arm to hit Yukito’s neck, Abe exclaims what Yukito is plotting, and with whom is he waving at. Friend exclaims that Yukito is a cunning guy. Puzzled Kotori wonders what that is about.

Friend says that no matter what is said, their [Kaji-s] progress is quite good. Blushing Yukito says that he can say that. Putting his arm around Yukito, Abe says that looking at his [Yukito] face, he has that vulgar smile. Friend comments that Kotori looks quite cute lately and it turns out that it has something to do with Yukito. Embarrassed Yukito tells him not to say it in a perverted way. Abe agrees that Kotori has indeed become more and more cuter. Embarassed Yukito exclaims that is not true, not one bit cuter, and it’s just ordinary. After a pause, Abe attacks Yukito again and exclaims for him to quit pretending and being shy about it. Friend then says that is quite praise-worthy. Yukito asks what it is. Friend says that Harada is wearing black underwear. Harada is cheering after a good hit of the ball. Someone exclaims that Harada is actually that kind of person and her bra is seen through [her shirt]. Another says that it is quite unexpected. Yukito says that it’s quite flirty since it is black. Friend says that since it is Harada, it might be deliberate..to make it see-through. Abe agrees with that. Abe says that even if it suppose to turn them on, but it still depends on the person. Yukito and friend agree. Yukito starts to wonder what color of underwear Kotori wears. He thinks that it would be pink, which pretty much suits her. Then, he imagines Kotori naked but her hair and arms covering her chest. Blushing, Yukito thinks that he never once seen it so there is no way of concretely imagining it. “But, perhaps it is colored white? It ought to be similar with her feelings.. generally.” Friend calls Yukito’s attention and tells him that other girl is also quite impressive. Yukito asks what it is this time. Friend says that girl, her chest is quite big. Abe agrees with him. Friend asks if it is Nakabayashi [中林]. Abe says that it is. He asks which girl in their class has the biggest chest. Yukito says, who knows. While Friend is exclaiming that other girl is also quite big, Abe says that Yukito isn’t going along with them. Yukito glumly thinks that whether near or far, he can also see them but he isn’t interested about big or small, he is only interested in Kotori.
To Yukito’s surprise, Friend says what about his girlfriend. Friend looks at the court to look for Kotori. Blushing Yukito quickly covers the eyes of his friend and exclaims that he can’t look, don’t look at her with such vulgar eyes. Friend says that they are just going to look, and Yukito doesn’t have to be too extreme like this. Yukito insists that he can’t. Abe asks him how it is. Yukito is puzzled so Abe says whether it is big or small, what it was like touching it. Friend asks if Yukito has touched it, so tell them about it. Blushing and speechless, Yukito thinks that he hasn’t touched it yet. “When that girl had a fever, the time when I took care of her, during the birthday [celebration], wearing comparatively loose clothes, I.. only.. caught a glance! But, I never thought, about whether her chest is small or big. I’m also not sure what it is like! Is.. is it truly very big? But, still, it could be comparatively small. Even if it is only a glance..” To Yukito’s embarrassment, Abe exclaims for people to look at Yukito showing a ‘changed face’. Friend says what that is, he thought Yukito is acting cool, but fundamentally, his desires are unsatisfied. “Since it is like this, for you, Yukito, I’m going to lend to you my secret book. Look--♪” Yukito and Abe are surprised for friend is holding a porn magazine called Style♥. Yukito exclaims how he could bring such a book in PE class. Friend says isn’t this good. Holding the magazine, Abe blushes and exclaims that it is the rumored big boobs album collection. Just then, Kotori misses the volleyball and it falls at the side. Looking at the magazine, Abe says that this is quite lewd. Friend says that even if it isn’t the real thing, but this is quite awesome, and he can lend it to them. Abe says to lend it to him first. Friend says okay, Abe will be first. “Yukito, do you also want to see it?” Yukito is a bit hesitant that Friend says okay, if he doesn’t want to, it’s okay. Yukito suddenly exclaims that he wants to see it. Friend happily says that the correct reaction ♪ Abe is calling Yukito’s attention and tells him to wait and stop. Yukito turns around and asks what it is. He sees Kotori holding the volleyball. Looking dark, she mutters, ‘huge..breasts..’ Yukito looks aghast.
Back in the classroom, everyone is busy preparing for their horror cafe. Yukito glances at Kotori. Then, he goes to her to tell her that he isn’t really that into that stuff a while ago. With a frozen expression, Kotori turns to face him and denies that she minds it, and it is really alright. Yukito becomes nervous. He sheepishly tries to explain that it is simply a curiosity and there is no other meaning to it. Aghast, Kotori says that even so, he really likes those stuff. Yukito laughs and admits that he does..a bit. His smile freezes when Kotori smiles at him. Yukito immediately exclaims for her to wait, it isn’t.. Running away, Kotori exclaims for him to go die [buried] within big boobs throughout his life (you, honest fool~~). Yukito wonders out loud what’s up with this. Later on, at Natsume’s house, Kotori looks at her cellphone. Yukito is calling her but she doesn’t want to answer it. Removing her coat, Natsume asks if she isn’t going to answer it. Kotori just happily says, yes, it is alright, it is just some lewd guy, and compared to that, she is really sorry for suddenly coming to her house. “I want to see your cosplay outfit for the school festival.” Natsume tells her that it is totally okay. “Are you guys quarrelling? *dark* Do you want me to teach him a lesson?” Feeling Natsume’s murderous intent, Kotori quickly assures her that they didn’t quarrel but rather, she is making a fuss over nothing. “Upon seeing Yukito looking at that kind of book, I was really shock.. (I don’t have that kind of chest.. and I feel that I’ve lost..) Of course, my [older] brother also has a girlfriend, and his room also has those kind of books hidden inside, and I clearly know that it isn’t a big deal, but.. (Even if I clearly know, but..) within my heart, there are all sorts of mixed feelings.. thinking that Yukito should be like that.. *Natsume quietly listens* It would be nice if my chest is a bit bigger.” Natsume asks if it is really that small. To Kotori’s surprise, Natsume gropes her chest. Quickly turning aside and covering her chest, Kotori exclaims Natsume’s name and says what she is doing all of a sudden. Natsume tells her that it would do. Wiggling her fingers, Natsume smiles and says that Kotori’s chest felt good and it feels okay, so don’t worry. Embarrassed Kotori says that her [Natsume] hands pose is quite vicious.
Changing the topic, Natsume asks about Kotori’s outfit for the school festival, and what is she going to wear. Kotori exclaims that she wants to hear her opinion about it so she brought it with her. Natsume says that since it is like that, then go change her clothes so that she can see it. Kotori tells her to wait as she go and change. Meanwhile, back in school, at the shoe lockers, Yukito pouts since Kotori won’t answer his phone call. Looking at the shoe locker, Kotori’s shoes are gone so she must have left. Looking at his cellphone, Yukito wonders if Kotori didn’t answer his phone and just went home. “—could it be.. that something has happened? Before, on the way home after work, she was also being stalked by some guy.. Even if that is Matsushima’s mischief.. but, that girl lately is quite cute.. Ah! No way that will happen! That girl? No way, no way, no way, but..” He pauses and remembers Abe & Friend saying that Kotori looks cuter lately. Yukito looks dark. Then he quickly gets ready to leave when he gets a message on his cellphone. He exclaims, “Kotori!?” Back at Natsume’s house, Kotori says that she has finished changing, so what does she think. Natsume’s expression is speechlessly surprised. Kotori exclaims, “Ka-ching♪ I temporarily call it, ‘Hell’s Angel’.” Holding a large whip, Kotori is wearing a short yukata, black wings, alien antenna hairband, and a skull necklace around her neck. Kotori happily tells Natsume that it will be quite scary if she put on some scary make-up. “I want to put in some cute feeling into it so I cut the yukata and doesn’t this seem like a cute little devil style? What do you think?” Natsume keeps smiling but she is aghast. She says, “Ah.. this-- What can I say? It.. Sorry. *holds Kotori’s shoulder* I feel that so many things are wrong! *Kotori is surprised* Right.. For you..isn’t it more important to emphasize the sense of beauty? Ah! Let me see! How about maid outfit? Didn’t you say that you wanted a maid outfit?” Kotori looks aghast for Natsume is saying these things as if her life depended on it. Kotori sadly says that she can no longer lend a maid outfit.. “It is also quite hard to manage, so I altered the borrowed yukata.. It seems that I still have to add a cloak, and how about drawing some skull symbols on the yukata?”
Natsume exclaims no. “Don’t--! That won’t also do! I’ll help you prepare! The outfit for the school festival, I’ll design it, okay? Leave it to me! Okay!?” Nervous Kotori says okay. Looking aghast + frozen smile, Natsume thinks that she doesn’t know what’s going on but she couldn’t tell Kotori that her sense of aesthetics is very, very different. Aghast Kotori calls out to Natsume. She wonders if it is really bad because it is her first time to see Natsume like that. Natsume smiles and says, “Relax! I’m make you super cute, that it will shock that Kaji guy! I think that compared to sexy, it is better for you to look cute, Kotori. And that way, it will make people feel that you are more sexy.” Kotori blushes over being sexy. Then, the door bell rings. Natsume exclaims that she’s coming. She tells Kotori that she is going to answer the door so go change her clothes first. Kotori says okay. As Kotori starts to change her clothes, she wonders if compared to being sexy, it is more suitable for her to be cute. “Does Yukito also think that way? It seems that he doesn’t hate big boobs, so I thought it is quite better to be a bit sexy.. *removes antenna hairband* Ah, right now, he is angry, right.. I had been snubbing his phone calls and emails. *removing the yukata* But, talking with him right now, my speaking tone would still be quite pungent[/strong]..” Suddenly, someone calls out, “Kotori?!” Kotori turns around to see Yukito. They look at each other and scream since Kotori is midway removing her yukata, and her underwear is seen. Hiding at the side, Kotori exclaims why he is there. Looking away, blushing Yukito says why..didn’t she fell down the stairs and became unconscious. Kotori exclaims in disbelief about this. Just when Yukito is telling her that Natsume told him that Kotori’s head is bleeding, he stops midway and realizes that he has been tricked. There is scene of Natsume smiling and flashing a v-sign. Scratching his head, Yukito exclaims that girl frightened him to death. “But, *smiles* it’s great that you are okay. I didn’t know when you went home, and no one is answering the phone, that I thought that something must have happened to you.”
Kotori timidly asks if he isn’t angry. Yukito asks why he would be angry. Kotori says that it is because she recklessly had a tantrum, and deliberately didn’t answer his phone call. “Are you really not angry..” Yukito says, “Ah, is that so-- that's right! But, compared to that, the first thing that I thought about is whether something happened to you.. *smiles* Haha, I totally didn’t think about that! *Kotori blushes* What’s going on? I might be a person who loves to worry? Ah! It shouldn’t be that.. *thinking* Possibly, it is that.. I.. *blush* like you more.. compared to what I’ve imagined” Kotori quickly runs out and hugs Yukito tight. Yukito blushes and exclaims in surprise. Kotori says, “I also really like you.. extremely like.. *Yukito blushes* Even if you like big boobs, I also like you!” Yukito says that it seems that she still minds that very much. Then, he looks surprised. He looks away and exclaims for her to quickly wear clothes. After being puzzled, Kotori quickly lets out a scream and covers her chest. She exclaims if Yukito has seen it, he has seen it, right. Yukito denies that he has seen it. While putting on her blouse, Kotori says that compared to that, where did Natsume go, just now, she hasn’t seen her around.. Yukito looks surprised and points to a note on the door and says, that.. Kotori turns to look at the note. The note on the door says: “I have something to do so I went out. You guys take your time ♡ Natsume.” Blushing Kotori thinks, “What..!?” Scans by 依蓮扫漫組.

Reimei no Arcana [Chapter 36]

2012-01-08T19:37:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 7, 2012

Cover page: “Which side of the future should I choose?” After Irasifu has been beheaded, the people in the square shout in jubilation for finally, the leader of the thieves is dead. Someone shouts that their children were killed by their snakes, and with this, the country can be at peace once again. At first, they shout, “Prince Baatar..” then changes it into “HIS MAJESTY Baatar--!!” Baatar proudly grabs Irasifu’s head and shows it off to the people. Still standing together with Loki among the people, Nakaba thinks, “Named as a goddess. A girl’s head is hoisted up high. A smiling man. *teary eyed* I’m going to kill him.” Nakaba has already grabbed her sword and ready to charge towards Baatar but Loki immediately holds her back. He covers her eyes and quickly drags her away towards an alley between some buildings. Nakaba is furious for Irasifu felt happy when Baatar called her, that she even had romantic feelings for that kind of man. Nakaba shouts for Loki to let her go, for that man cannot become king. “That person treated [that] Ajin like a chess piece, and he took advantage of her feelings of admiration [for him]! *Loki looks at her* That’s right.. He obviously knew of her feelings for him and still, he treated her as a chess piece!” Loki calmly tells her, “But that is the reality of this world.” Teary-eyed Nakaba trembles and loosens her grip on Loki. She bends down and grieves for Irasifu. She thinks that if that is so, then it is okay for this whole world to disappear.

Then, darkness envelops Nakaba. She looks up to see two long columns of door in both sides. Dressed up in her usual outfit, Nakaba stands up and realizes that she is within the Arcana of Time. She thinks that the doors there are this world’s memories. “Leading to the future, leading to the past.. in endless succession. Which one is best for me to look into..” She notices a light. She turns around to see a wolf looking at her. The light around the wolf vanishes and it quickly runs off. Running after it, Nakaba calls for it to wait. She wonders why it is there. The wolf goes in an open door. Nakaba looks in to see that there are two other doors inside. She goes in the door on the right first. Nakaba sees herself and others, together with the Lithvanel princes. They are at some place where there are ruined buildings. Ahkil tells his brother that it is Baatar’s private soldiers and those soldiers will soon chase after them. “Quickly, leave this place.” Some soldiers point at them and shouts, “There, chase after them!” Future Nakaba shouts for Ahkil to go hide behind those rocks. To their surprise, Azhar says that he is the one whom they are after so they should go first, as he lures them away as bait. To Future Nakaba’s surprise, Ahkil runs after his brother. The soldiers had caught Azhar. Just when the soldiers are about to kill Azhar, Ahkil goes in front of them and he was cut down by the soldier. Future Nakaba shouts his name. The soldier laughs and says that this really saves them a lot of effort because Baatar-sama also told them to definitely kill the fifth prince. Nakaba is stunned that Ahkil is going to be killed. “Lie.. It’s a lie.. I hate this kind of future..!”
Nakaba quickly runs out of the door and goes to the other door. It is the same scene wherein Ahkil tells his brother Azhar to quickly leave the place for the soldiers will soon chase after them. The soldiers see them and shout that they are there, chase after them. Future Nakaba shouted for Ahkil to hide. Azhar would use himself as bait since he is their goal. Ahkil wants to go after his brother but Future Nakaba grabs his arm tightly and shouts for him to stop[, don’t go]. And, Azhar has been cut down by the soldier. As Azhar lie down on the ground, the soldier exclaims that it is amazing that they got rid of Azhar, and they should quickly inform Baatar-sama. Teary-eyed Nakaba stands there in shock. “What is this? Is this like telling me to choose? Choosing between Prince Azhar or Ahkil, which one should live on. Is this to make me choose? It’s too mean. It’s too cruel. I can’t do it.” Nakaba returns to reality with Loki calling out to her. She snaps out of it and looks at Loki. He asks her if she is alright, and did she start up the Arcana of Time again. He worriedly tells her that if she uses it too many times, it is harmful to her body. He touches her eyes and says, “Tears..” Teary-eyed Nakaba looks at him and thinks, “Loki.. if someone can live, no matter how many times, I will use this power.. But, it isn’t that kind of power. It is making me choose which person I would want to be killed.”
Scans by Rei'S工作室

The One [Chapter 85]

2012-01-08T19:35:00.002+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 6, 2012

Cover page: “Happiness, conveniently here[/at hand]..” In the kitchen, Eros is cooking while Lele watches him. Lele exclaims that it turns out that he knows how to cook and it looks better than her own cooking. While spooning the congee into a bowl, Eros says that he had not cooked congee yet, and this is according to the instructions that she left Taylor. He asks her to taste it and if it pass. As Eros spoon feeds, Lele tastes it and smiles. He asks again if it pass. Then, a bag drops. Taylor and Leo had just come in and they were surprised to see the two in the middle of their lovey-dovey. Sweatdropping Leo exclaims that he was very worried about Lele because of his big mouth but it turns out that he has been thinking too much. Sweatdropping Taylor exclaims that it seems that Eros is feeling okay now. Leo tells Eros that it seems that Lele has taken good care of him so he can now go back home at ease. Taylor says that if he needs his help, just mention it. Leo says that they won’t disturb them so bye. After they quickly left, Lele and Eros look at each other and laugh. While kissing with Eros, Lele thinks that things are turning out wonderfully and happiness came without a warning. Is it a dream? If it is a dream, please don’t wake me up too fast. The scene changes to sleeping Angus. Ulysses kisses him at the back and wakes him up. Ulysses reminds him of their lunch together with his stupid son and new lover. Angus says that it is his son, so why not go there by himself. Ulysses exclaims no for it is necessary for him to confirm that his son already given up on him [Angus], for him [Ulysses] to be at ease. Angus asks what he meant by that. Ulysses asks if he didn’t know that actually, at that time, when Will and Feidna partnered up to compete against him [Angus] in that advertisement.

It is actually a gamble between him and his son. He and his son had fallen for Angus. To prevent Ulysses from chasing after Angus, Will asked him to have a gamble with him. That is if the performance of Will’s advertisement surpasses Angus’, Ulysses would give up on Angus. Angus speechless. And, in the end, Will lost and Ulysses smoothly got Angus, and it was a major blow for Will. Fortunately, Will has made a new friend lately but it is the first time for Will to tell him [Ulysses] to meeting someone. So, he cannot help but become suspicious if Will has really given up or he would just want an opportunity to see Angus. Angus speechless. So for Will to totally give up, they are going to show their ‘lovey-dovey/conjugal love’ in front of Will. Then, at a restaurant, Will came with Yang. Will calls out to Ulysses and says that it has been a long time, old man. Ulysses hit Will for calling him ‘old man’, and scolds him for having no manners. Ulysses says that even if he is his father but based on external appearance, they would look like brothers. “Right, Angus? darling~” Speechless Angus sweatdrops. Hitting him again, Ulysses tells his son to call him father. Will says okay, father, this is my good friend, Yang. Yang politely greets him. Ulysses greets him back and apologizes for the ‘funny thing with his son’ earlier. He thinks that he isn’t bad since Yang is a bishounen [beautiful young man]. He says that Angus doesn’t need any introductions. Holding up his wine glass, Angus greets Will and Yang, saying that it is the first time he met them. Soon Will and Ulysses are drunk, Angus and Yang are standing at the ship, looking towards the sea. Angus says that it is unexpectedly to see him there and it has been a long time. After a pause, Yang asks if Angus isn’t going to ask why he is with Will. Angus asks if this is something he ought to know. Yang thinks that Angus is still the same, he hasn’t change..no warmth in his eyes, the same Angus who doesn’t love anyone. Blushing Yang says that he has been thinking of him. Angus asks wasn’t he going steady with Will. Yang says that is the only way for him to see him [Angus], and he left New York for such a long time. Angus says that now that he has seen him, what now? This surprises Yang that he wonders why Angus has become colder than before.
Yang asks him what happened to him during all this time, even if he doesn’t have the right to ask[/get involved in], but he has thoroughly disappeared for such a long time and this hasn’t happened before. Angus asks isn’t he well and currently standing here. Yang cries that Angus asks why he is crying then says, oh, I see.. He kisses Yang. He says that is what Yang wants. Still crying, Yang asks him if he remembered that he said that he can die for him and that isn’t a lie. Surprised Angus pushes him away. Turning to leave, Angus tells him to leave for his world isn’t something that he [Yang] can mix up and go in. “I can give you only this much. Leave and be content with that! Otherwise, you’ll only become more unfortunate[/miserable].” Yang is surprised by this. Back to New York, Lele has been rummaging around the place that Eros asks what she is looking for. Lele holds out her hand and says that it is good that he came, give it to her. He asks what. She says the ‘Silver/Yin’ earring that she gave him. Later on, Lele happily looks at the earring. She jumps around the bed for he didn’t throw it away. Eros thinks that she is quite concerned about that. Eros tells her that he didn’t think of throwing it away but he put it away in order to exchange places with Angus. Then, Lele pulls his hair aside and puts the earring on his ear. Lele tells him that next time, he isn’t allowed to remove it without her consent because from now on, it symbolizes for ‘you belong to me’. “Wearing it and you’ll become my ‘thing’! And my ‘thing’ has to listen to me! Understand?” They kiss.
And the following days, they become like ordinary lovers. Shopping in the supermarket together, and bickering over small things together. And while walking in the streets, they will hold hands naturally. “Grandma~ It turns out..what you’ve told me in the dream is true! *It’s raining so Eros uses his coat as their cover and they happily run through the rain* Beside me.. there is really a silver-eyed angel protecting me! And I.. also want to protect this person, always until forever--” After taking a shower, Lele goes in the bedroom to say she is finished, and it is his turn. She finds Eros in bed that she wonders if he is sleeping. Sitting on the other bed, Lele wonders how could Eros sleep for shouldn’t the story be at its climax around this time. She hears Eros groaning that she quickly goes to him and asks him what’s wrong, is he feeling ill. Aghast Lele thinks that even if she has seen those flare-ups numerous times, she is helpless during those times. She asks if it hurts. Eros says that if she is scared, she can leave since he knows that she is scared every time this happens. He tells her to go out and he’ll be fine by himself. Lele shakes her head and says that she was never afraid of him. Starting to cry, Lele tells him that didn’t she tell him to only let her see his ugly appearance/side. “But..for me to be unable to help you, I hate this me who is powerless.” She is surprised when Eros touches her hand. He tells her to let him hug her. He somewhat forces himself to smile and tells her that before he won’t dare ask her to stay so he never dare say it but right now.. Narration: “Let me hug you! *Lele hugs Eros tight and he hugs her back* .As long as I hug you.. I’ll have the sufficient courage to withstand everything--!” Next chapter will be out on Feb 5th in Taiwan
Scans by Icy_Chrisy for baidu

Hadashi de Bara wo Fume [Chapter 54]

2012-01-08T19:34:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 6, 2012

Cover page: “Second time wearing a white wedding gown, and the wedding partner will be..” Soichiroh is shock that Nozomu is pointing the shotgun at him. He quickly covers his face and tells Nozomu to stop. A gunshot rings in the air. Soichiroh looks at Nozomu to see him pointing the smoking gun upwards. As a tear falls down his cheek, Nozomu asks why it is Soichiroh. Beard guy arrives and asks if they shot one. Looking normal Nozomu says that he missed. While Nozomu and the beard guy walk away talking about not being able to shot a deer, Soichiroh just looks glum. Soon, it is time to leave. Beard guy is happy about this delightful business discussion. Shaking Nozomu’s hand, he invites Nozomu and Sumi to England. As they talk, Soichiroh and Sumi exchange meaningful glances. Nozomu sees this, that he looks totally furious after Soichiroh and Beard guy had left. Upon returning home, Sumi mentions about wanting to go to shogi club tomorrow but Nozomu says that he is dissolving the club because a lot of people have to work overtime, and it isn’t a good influence on them to keep on indulging their time in the club. He says that there is an intense influenza going around so it is best for her to stay home. Nozomu hires two new butlers and fires Komai. Sumi tries to insist that Komai stays but Nozomu shouts that Komai should quickly pack his things and leave. Komai leaves. Two butlers stop Sumi from going after Komai, and Nozomu says that he is going to work. At the office, a man tells Nozomu that things had already been properly arranged. He says good job.

In the house, guarded by the two butlers, Sumi thinks that she has been staying in the room for three days. She wonders if Nozomu has found out about what happened between her and Soichiroh. She dismisses that thought as something impossible. She looks at the ring that Nozomu gave her and she sadly thinks that the ring Soichiroh gave her was thrown away by Nozomu. Then, a butler comes in and tells her to dress up for she is going to visit Nozumu’s father. At Ijuin main residence, Nozomu happily greets his father and asks if he is okay, he brought Sumi to see him. His father is lying on the bed. His wife is sitting on a chair beside the bed. Bringing kimono clad Sumi in, Nozomu comments that his father likes kimono. Sumi greets Nozomu’s father and says that is has been a long time. His father sits up and exclaims, “Masako [真紗子]..!!” Sumi is surprised and Nozomu nervously asks what he is saying, she is Sumi. Sumi asks who Masako is. Nozomu says that Masako is his mother. Nozomu’s father stands up and holds Sumi’s shoulder. He shouts that he isn’t mistaken, it is Masako. While his wife tries to stop him, Nozomu’s father keeps on insisting that it is Masako while Nozomu insists that she is Sumi, his fiancee. To Sumi and his father’s surprise, Nozomu tells his father to congratulate him for next week, he and Sumi are getting married.
Scans by 红莲汉化组

Kyou, Koi wo Hajimemasu [Side Story Part 1 of 2]

2012-01-08T19:30:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 5, 2012

Cover page: “Even if we’re separated, these feelings will definitely also still--” The result of the hairstyle competition during the school festival is out. Tsubaki wins first place. A short haired girl exclaims that it is truly amazing and more kouhai-s had overwhelming took first place. The long haired girl asks what about the grades. In the bulletin board, it is shown that Tsubaki is in first place in both academics and skills[/hairstyling] at the school’s early term ranking. They ask, “Tsubaki, what kind of person are you?” Holding a mannequin, light colored haired Tsubaki hesitantly smiles and says, “Ah.. asking me what kind of person I am.. I’m only an ordinary student in a specialty school..” Her long haired friend exclaims that fundamentally, she isn’t ordinary. “You also even get to study under that graduate student Hananoi! It’s really nice. I also want to work at parfait.” Short haired friend tells the long haired girl that a person who made a mistake in the amount of dye, and dyed the customer’s hair into gold/blond, cannot be used. An arrow points that ‘customer’ is Tsubaki. Long haired girl holds Tsubaki’s shoulder and tearfully cries to apologize to Tsubaki. Then, someone calls out to Tsubaki. It is Hiro. While still holding her mannequin head, Tsubaki and friends approach him. Long haired friend is gushing that it is the person himself. She asks him why he is there. Hiro tells her that he is there to discuss the details of a special beauty symposium that he is in charge with. Long haired friend squeals if that is true, then it’s amazing, she eagerly anticipates it. Hiro clarifies that even if he said it is beauty, but it isn’t for the school in Tokyo but rather, the sister school in Kyoto. While long haired friend is disappointed to hear that, Hiro looks at Tsubaki and says that there is something that he would want to trouble her with. In her bedroom, Tsubaki happily calls up Kyouta about her working trip to Kyoto. Hiro will be going to their school’s branch in Kyoto, and she get to go there as his assistant. Kyouta says, Hananoi..huh.. Tsubaki exclaims yes, because it is a working trip the school will shoulder all of the expenses and it will be a two days and one night trip starting on Oct 31st so this way, she can go there directly to celebrate his birthday. Kyouta lets out a laugh that Tsubaki asks him what it is. Kyouta says no..it is just that for the first time since they were talking on the phone, she is this happy. “Are you very happy because you can see me?” This made Tsubaki blush but she exclaims her denial by saying that she is only happy because she doesn’t have to pay the transportation fees. Kyouta just smiles over it and says that he is very happy that they’ll get to see each other *Tsubaki blushes more* because this year, they have reached the ‘three year plan’ and it is a very special day. Tsubaki says, yes.

There is a short narration of Tsubaki that in her house there is a meteorological apparatus kit which consists of a projector and three films. Because she wants to continue on having a relation/connection with Kyouta, through a stange method, starting from October of their first year high school, she starts giving him one piece of the whole kit each year. At the end of third year high school, she has already given him all three films, and this year, it will be the projector. And thus, the ‘three year plan’ has finally ended. While Tsubaki looks at the projector on her dressing table, Kyouta says that he can’t wait to get the planetarium projector, and see bad [delinquent] girl hairstyle Tsubaki. He admits that after seeing her picture, he is really shock. Laughing, Kyouta teases her that he didn’t know that she fundamentally wants to become a bad girl. Tsubaki exclaims that it is a dyeing practice accident and tomorrow, she is going to dye it back. Kyouta asks why, how boring, just come that way. Kyouta is surprised when Tsubaki says that even if he said that, and she agrees, but Hiro said.. Flashback: Holding Tsubaki’s blond hair, Hiro angrily says that he wants to kill the person who made his beloved black hair into this color. “Relax, with my skill, there won’t even be any slight damage, as I turn your hair back into black!” Kyouta asks her if she has already decided where she will be staying upon arriving in Kyoto. Tsubaki says that she isn’t sure because she wasn’t told of the details yet. He tells her to refuse the arranged place where she’ll be staying, and when she arrives at his house, he won’t let her go until it is morning. Tsubaki blushes over that and says, “Okay, I understand.” Then, she hears a girl’s voice, “Kyouta~ the on-the-spot study 2 here..” Tsubaki freezes then tries to act normal by asking Kyouta if he is currently writing a school report with his college classmates. Kyouta says ya, and they are in his house but totally don’t mind them. The classmate angrily says what he just said. Then, another classmate calls out to Kyouta to tell them [the answer?] Tsubaki just says okay, and it is almost time for her to sleep. Kyouta says is that so, then bye-bye. Tsubaki bids him good night and hangs up the phone. Leaning on the dressing table, Tsubaki sadly looks at the cellphone of a picture of Kyouta’s classmates [two guys and a girl] happily holding out beer cans and a sake/wine bottle. She thinks, “This girl came to Kyouta’s house again, huh.. How irritating.. Tsubaki-kun has already went to Kyoto for half a year, and finally, we can see each other for a second time.. Each day is accompanied with a bit of uneasiness.”
Soon, Tsubaki, together with Hiro, arrives in Kyoto. Tsubaki happily takes a picture of Kyoto station. Hiro asks her if she has been continuing that exchange picture thing with her boyfriend. While happy over her picture which isn’t blurry from shaking, Tsubaki says yes. Hiro comments that her boyfriend doesn’t seem the type who would continue this kind of thing for such a long time. While texting Kyouta that she has arrived, Tsubaki tells him that unexpectedly, Kyouta is more serious about it than her. Blushing, Tsubaki says that after sending this message, it truly feels that he is thinking of her right now. Hiro comments that just like before, they mutually love each other [bound by deep emotions]. Tsubaki says that is right, and compared to that, didn’t he [Hiro] had enough, and don’t keep on touching her hair. Hiro says that it is because it looks quite shiny, no strand of hair is damaged, and not only did it return back to its original color, it is totally protected. “It turns out that my skill is quite outstanding!!” Tsubaki tells him that he isn’t listening to her. Then, Tsubaki gets a message from Kyouta. Hiro notices that Tsubaki looks surprised. He asks her what was said. Tsubaki tells him that Kyouta and his classmates stayed overnight to work on their school report, and they had just finished so right now, he is going to sleep. Looking at a a picture of his classmates tired and sleeping on her cellphone, Tsubaki says that it seems that everyday, Kyouta and the others have to write a pile of troublesome reports and they will always stay overnight at Kyouta’s house. Hiro says that it is a bit worrisome for there is a girl among those classmates. To his surprise, Tsubaki says that she totally isn’t worried. Talking nonstop, Tsubaki explains, “It is only by coincidence that he is grouped together with a girl. I’m not a petty kind of girl who would worry over little things like this small thing. And, even if he did something that would make him feel guilty, he would also not specially take a picture and show it to me. *smiles* Don’t you think that way?” Hiro’s eyes somewhat slits [<- thinking of something bad =P]. He says, who knows, for based on different circumstances, there’s a need to exchange with that person, and that kind of person does exist. Tsubaki says that he is saying some ill intention stuff again. Hiro laughs and says that he isn’t. “Before, I really love and really trusted my girlfriend. Then during the time when we are apart, she fell in love with a male friend who is beside her. *Tsubaki looks surprised and says, oh..* Ah, this isn’t the time to be talking about this, let’s quickly go to the school.”
At the school’s auditorium, Hiro is doing his demonstration in front of the students. Tsubaki is too awed by Hiro’s skill that he has to angrily call her attention to give him the hair curler. Soon, it is a job well done. At a conference room, Tsubaki happily tells Hiro that it is really amazing, unexpectedly that kind of hairstyle can be done. “Thank you for letting me come along with you!!” After packing his luggage, Hiro says is that so, for fundamentally, she doesn’t seem to be an assistant since she just stand there and ogle at his hand, thus she isn’t much help. This shocks Tsubaki. She apologizes and says that she is in a trance because it is too amazing. Hiro says, but, her gloomy expression during the day is now gone, and it is quite good to make oneself learn something, that one is quite passionate about. This surprises Tsubaki then she smiles and says, yes! Just when Tsubaki is about to take her leave, Hiro gives her a paper. Puzzled Tsubaki takes it. He tells her that he will be staying in that place, and if something happens, she can go and look for him. Tsubaki is puzzled that she asks him what would happen. Hiro says maybe like having a quarrel with her boyfriend-type of stuff. Tsubaki smiles and says that didn’t she tell him already. “There’s no need for you worry about something happening between us. I don’t need this thing.” Hiro replies, “I’m not worried about your relationship [with him]. Fundamentally, it isn’t allowed for you to stay at your boyfriend’s house on a working trip. If something happens between the two of you, then I would have to be responsible for allowing you to stay elsewhere. So, you need to know my address.” Holding the paper, Tsubaki apologizes to him. Waving goodbye, he tells her not to be late, and good work. She says yes, and leaves. After she left, Hiro smiles and says to himself that the opportunity to get between them [Tsubaki-s] ought to almost arrive. He looks out the window and sees that it is raining. Hiro says that it feels like a weather wherein something is going to happen.
Soon, Tsubaki reaches Kyouta’s apartment and she is drenched wet from the rain. She exclaims that weather report didn’t mention about raining. She looks at her cellphone and realizes that she read the Tokyo weather. Taking out her bag from her coat, Tsubaki wonders what she is to do for even if she arrived at Kyouta’s place, but she is early by an hour of the time they agreed to meet, and won’t she be troubling him. She thinks that she couldn’t let the projector stay wet and this is an emergency. She presses the door bell. Ding dong. She waits and the door opens. Tsubaki happily apologizes for coming early but because it rained.. A girl wearing only a hoodie, opens the door and says, “Who are you-?” Tsubaki is surprised. She asks if this isn’t Kyouta’s house. The girl says that if she is looking for Kyouta, he is currently taking a bath but he’ll be finished soon. Tsubaki is surprised that Kyouta is taking a bath. She recognizes the girl as the one she always sees in the pictures that Kyouta sent her. While the girl turns and tells Tsubaki that she’ll call Kyouta, Tsubaki thinks that this girl’s outfit is too much. “Huh..? That outfit.. Isn’t that Tsubaki-kun’s..?” Tsubaki bites her lip and trembles. The girl calls out to Kyouta to quickly come out, and it’s alright if he is naked. Kyouta opens the door and shouts at Komatsu [guesswork name from 小松] that she is too noisy. Wiping himself with a towel, Kyouta asks why she didn’t go home yet when he told her[/them] that they should quickly go because he has things to attend to. Grabbing Komatsu’s hoodie, Kyouta angrily says that she still wears other people’s clothes as she pleases. “Take it off!!” Pointing to the door, Komatsu tells him to wait, compared to this, he has a guest. He angrily asks where. Komatsu says, there..where is she? By the door, a bag is left on the floor. Kyouta looks surprised for he recognizes the bag.
While walking in the rain, Tsubaki answers her cellphone, and it is a call from Kyouta. Kyouta asks her what’s up with her that she quickly left. After a pause, she says, no.. Kyouta says that it seems that she has misunderstood something at his house. Tsubaki says that it is Komatsu, the one in his experiment group... “Earlier, I had seen the morning picture of the three in your house. Komatsu, she would occasionally be the last one to stay behind..right?” Breathing hard, standing behind her, Kyouta holds an umbrella to her. Closing his phone, Kyouta says, “If you know.. then how come you still?” Tsubaki replies, “I think.. that there is also.. times when you have to finish school work with a girl.. but what can I say when it is something inevitable that [she] stays in your house..? The me who thinks that way.. *trembling* would be quite petty, right..” Kyouta puts his arm around her and says that she’ll catch a cold so they should go back first.. Tsubaki suddenly grabs his hoodie and says, “Enough.. Don’t wear the clothes that some other girl just wore..! How vexing.. It isn’t easy for us to once again meet.. *crying and flustered* but the things that I’m saying can be quite detestable.. I’m really sorry.. Today, I don’t want to be with you, Tsubaki-kun. I’m sorry..” Tsubaki runs off, leaving surprised Kyouta. Soon, at room 308 of a hotel, Hiro says, “Is that so? Thankfully, you know where I live, right?” Tsubaki apologizes and asks if right now, he can book another room. To her shock, Hiro smiles and says that it is impossible for right now is the peak season for traveling to Kyoto and it is a weekend. He tells her that he managed to get this room because someone else had cancelled. Aghast, Tsubaki says is that so, then she’ll go to the first floor’s lounge.. After sneezing and turning to leave, Hiro grabs the straps of her bag and says, “But, I have good news! *pulling her inside* This is a two bedroom place[/room], and one of the rooms is empty! Hibino, today you∙can∙use it☆” Tsubaki exclaims that there’s no need to. Hiro asks, “Ha? You want to refuse?” Tsubaki says how she could give him trouble like this. Removing her coat, Hiro says, “..if you don’t want to give me trouble, strip.. *Tsubaki tensely calls his name* Let me tell you, Hibino.. *holding Tsubaki’s hair* Drenched thoroughly wet like this and running to a hotel to pass the night, if you catch a cold tomorrow and you are unable to do your assistant work, how are you going to take responsibility for that? *trembling while angrily holding Tsubaki’s hair* If you understand that, then quickly strip off those wet clothes. *takes her bag, pushes her in the bathroom and tosses a towel & bathrobe to her* Take a shower! Immediately take a shower!”
Inside the bathroom, Tsubaki nervously wonders what to do for she’ll be staying in the same room with Hiro. She suddenly sneezes. She decides to first use the bathroom to warm herself up or else, she will really catch a cold. While taking a hot shower, she starts to feel like crying for according to what she imagined, she will use her own hands to give Kyouta the projector. “And, together with Tsubaki-kun, we’ll celebrate together his birthday and the miracle of going steady for three years. And, spend the night together in mutual embrace. *‘Today, I don’t want to be with Tsubaki-kun’* But, I suddenly said that kind of thing.. *cries* I’ve ruined.. it all..” In Kyouta’s room, the hoodie is now in the trash can. Holding Tsubaki’s bag, Kyouta wonders where Tsubaki is going to spend the night. “Thoroughly drenched wet in an unfamiliar place. *puts bag on the table* Aside from me, the only one whom she can depend on is.. *remembers smiling Hiro -> angry pop vein* If I knew early, I should have gotten her to stay here..! *takes out cellphone and Tsubaki’s phone starts ringing* Quickly, pick it up..!” Hiro takes out Tsubaki’s cellphone from her coat. Seeing that it is Kyouta calling, Hiro smiles and answers it. Kyouta is surprised that it is a guy’s voice. Then, he asks if this is Hananoi. Hiro replies, “Isn’t it quite rude of you to directly call someone’s name, In-trouble boyfriend-kun?” Kyouta tells him to please get Tsubaki to answer the phone. Hiro says that unfortunately, right now, Hibino is taking a shower. Kyouta apologizes for giving him trouble because of their personal problem. “I’m going right now to get Tsubaki. Can you tell me the address?” Hiro answers, “How can I tell you? Right now, it is my greatest chance to make a move on Hibino. Until this morning, I will properly pacify her!” Kyouta says that fundamentally, it is impossible for him to make a move on Tsubaki. Hiro retorts that he is naive. “There has been a substantial change of situation. Next year, I will be going to Italy. Even if I make a move, Hibino will be far away from me. And it already doesn’t matter. Ah, Hibino is almost finished taking a shower. Thank you very much for giving me this chance. *Kyouta stands up and tells Hiro to wait* For me to show my gratitude towards you, I’ll give you a hint. Room 308, a room among numerous hotels in the tourist city of Kyoto. If you can find it, then how about try finding it?” Hiro hears the door opening so he quickly puts Tsubaki’s cellphone behind his back. Blushing, Tsubaki says, about that.. Hiro asks if she has warmed herself up. She says yes, and thank you. While turning Tsubaki’s cellphone off, Hiro tells her to slowly tell him what happened between her and her boyfriend. Blurb: “Kyoto’s night, will--!? Next chapter, finally..[the] ending!!”
Scans by 水银工作室.

Mei-chan no Shitsuji [Chapter 117]

2012-01-08T19:29:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 4, 2012

Narration: “In this huge living mother planet, the world’s happiness has been entrusted to a chosen maiden. And as the star’s embodiment, the maiden becomes a goddess--” Four years ago: In an open valley where there is a lone tree, Xiang asks Fei if he feels that it is quite idiotic that at this time and age, to still believe in that superstition of their parents. Fei says that it doesn’t suit him to say that since he is the son of the village head. Narration: “Xiang and the other kids aren’t the same because he is very intelligent. The things that he always say would give the adults a headache.” Xiang answers that it is very strange [to believe] that in this information age, and this is why the village is poor because they treat people as fools. “Speaking of that, the current goddess is now some 80 year old grandma..” Then, water is splashed on him. Above the tree, there is a young girl holing a water gun. She says that is heaven’s punishment for even if it is Xiang, he cannot say bad things about the goddess. Fei apologizes to Xiang for his younger sister’s rudeness. Fei shouts at Rishu* to quickly apologize. [*invented name from リシュ; in Chinese it is 由 which is different.] Xiang says that it is alright for anyway, it is hot. Fei asks him why he is spoiling Rishu. Xiang asks if he is spoiling her. Fei exclaims that he is. Using a towel on Xiang, Rishu happily says that she’ll wipe him dry. Xiang thanks her. Rishu tells him that goddess is dreaming of ‘everyone living in happiness’ everyday so they were able to become healthy as they pass their days. “That is what grandma told me.” Looking a bit sad, Xiang asks if this world is really happy. “In this world, there is war, disasters, crimes, sickness.. there are a lot of people suffering.. Would just becoming this kind of dream goddess, will the world really become happy..”

Rishu exclaims, “There’s no problem! When I become the next goddess, no matter how, I will make the world happy! So, Xiang.. Don’t show that kind of expression.. You have to smile forever.” She is surprised when Xiang suddenly shouts no, he won’t allow that. Rishu asks him why. Turning away, Xiang says that is because.. He just tells her that anyway, she shouldn’t say such foolish things again. Somewhat scowling, Rishu mutters, “Then.. what should be done..? To make this world.. To make you, Xiang become happy.. *This somewhat surprises Xiang* I don’t care anymore- *running off* I want to become the goddess!” Fei shouts that she is stupid, for how can someone like her become a goddess, and she should have self-knowledge. Rishu shouts that she says she will, she will. Fei sweatdrops and wonders, where her self-confidence is coming from. A bit flustered, Xiang mutters that Rishu doesn’t know the meaning of ‘becoming a goddess’. Fei asks what it is. Xiang says that it is nothing. Later on, an old man tells some people that the goddess has passed away. Someone protest that according to the doctor, she ought to live on for half a year. The old man tells them not to be apprehensive for the next generation goddess has awakened. “The menarche has already arrived, and she has a healthy body. She also has the ‘stars dreaming of happiness’ healthy soul. Lodging there.. lodging within the body of the chosen maiden.” Dressed up in a glamorous outfit, Rishu sits on a throne. She calls out to her mother as to where her brother Fei, and Xiang are, since she hasn’t seen them. Her mother didn’t reply. While the firecrackers are exploding in the night sky, everyone in the village is celebrating. At the open valley, Fei says that it turns out that he is there. Xiang is sitting down beside the tree. Looking at the moon, Xiang says that, in this place, he won’t see nor hear the noisy festival. Fei asks isn’t it quite inappropriate for the son of the village head, to not join the festival.
Xiang just asks him how Rishu is doing. Fei tells him that his mother said that Rishu is the same energetic[/lively] like before, and even if he is Rishu’s brother, he cannot meet up with the goddess. Xiang says that is right, fundamentally, it is like that. Fei answers, “But, you are not the same. The village head’s son is the future goddess’ husband. ..please definitely take good care of her.” Xiang says, “I’m the seventh. *Fei didn’t reply.* I still have brothers, and I’m the youngest, the seventh husband. The goddess cannot belong to only one person. All of the village head’s sons are her husband, in order to give birth, and exists.. kill all my [older] brothers! *Fei exclaims Xiang’s name* Haha, I’m kidding! *slight smile* If I were to do that, then the goddess will be sad.. No matter what is said, her wish is, for the whole world to be sufficiently happy..” After some silence, Xiang asks if Fei also smells something burning. They quickly run back to the village to see it burning. Fei exclaims if there has been fire due to the festival. Looking around, Xiang says no, it isn’t. From the fires, he sees some slain people on the ground. Worried about Rishu, Xiang shouts to Fei that they should hurry and go to the shine. While Xiang hopes that Rishu would be fine, the two boys run through the burning buildings and dead people in the village. In the shrine, they see Rishu slumping on the throne with gunshot wounds on the forehead and the chest. Xiang tries to go to her but Fei stops him for his sister is already.. , and they have to quickly go out because the place is going to collapse. Soon, they are back at the lone tree in the open valley. Fei grieves over his parents and Rishu. Xiang just stands there without an emotion. Then, some men in military gear exclaim that there is still living people there. A man shouts that they had been ordered to kill everyone in the village including women and children, and let no one remain. “Kill them!” The boys have a cold look in their eyes as they fight back and starts slaughtering their attackers.
Narration: “At that time, there is something within my heart that fell apart. After killing one person, I possibly felt a bit guilty. After killing the fifth person, I had already forgotten about myself. After killing the eighth person, I already had the knack of doing it. Ah yes-- it's really good that I learned some fighting technique from the neighboring grandpa. At that time, I cast a glance at Xiang.. he is dancing. *Xiang is killing with a knife* Yes, Xiang is really good in dancing that no one in the village, whether man or woman, can win against him. He is so aesthetically agile and gorgeous-- And even, a trace of a smile..?” After some gun shots, one of the attackers tell them that is enough, playful youngsters, go die. Then, someone tells the man not to be impatient. While the man tries to protest, the other man says, “Give them a chance. If you kids, refuse to come under me.. you can just die right here.” Holding his bleeding arm, Fei asks who would do that. Fei is surprised when Xiang smiles and says, “If we can, then we will truly be honored.” Narration: “Later on, we learned that beneath the village, there is a huge amount of precious rare earth[/metal] buried within. The government had asked the village to hand it over multiple times, and there is also a lot of pressure to do so, but in order to protect the sacred land, the village won’t comply. So, the government hired some other organization to come and destroy the village, and decided to do it on the day when everyone will be celebrating the festival of the [arrival of a] new goddess.. It is only for that thing, they had.. their hometown, family..” In some storage place, the boys are now wearing suits. While in anguish, Fei asks Xiang why they are going to serve those guys when those guys had made their village.. He is surprised when Xiang says, “..Goddess.. It is necessary for us to find a new goddess.. She will definitely awaken in some other place..” Fei looks surprised and thinks, “..but that is only.. that is only a superstition, right? Xiang..” With cold blank eyes, Xiang smiles and says, “You will go with me, right, Fei..” Fei closes his eyes and stands up. He says, “Since you’ve said it that way, Xiang..” Fei follows Xiang. Narration: “Regardless if it is a superstition or not, anything is okay. What’s left for us is to believe the goddess, this kind of thing..”
Scans by 17kkmh.com

Ojousama wa Oyomesama [Chapters 92-93]

2012-01-08T19:27:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 3, 2012

After being locked out of their residence, Towako and others are surprised that their house has been mortgaged. Towako asks her mother how this happened. Her mother also didn’t know how things ended up that way. Tsubaki tells them that the one who sequestered their property is some unknown small company and it could be ordered by Yachiougi Kyousuke. Towako remembers Kyousuke telling her that he would let them be if she hands over [their family name to him]. Yuuga notices that Towako looks tense. Then, Setsuna, together with Utsugi, arrive. Towako says that they came. Setsuna says of course, because this is the place where he grew up. This made Towako feel more frustrated since she cannot accept that they are being forced to leave it. Tokiko asks couldn’t they buy it back. Tsubaki says that it will be a bit difficult. Yuuga suggests that they live elsewhere first. Towako says that is right, and fortunately, they still have money. To their surprise, Setsuna suggests that they live at Kanmitsuki residence, including the servants. Towako tries to protest because his parents look scary. Setsuna tells them that he already told them so it is alright. Because of the things that have been happening, he is also more vigilant. He says but right now, it is only within his powers to prepare a place for them to stay. “It’s alright, just leave it to me.” Yuuga sweatdrops over Setsuna’s radiance like a Buddha that Towako thinks is too bright. Yuuga gloomily thinks that he felt a bit frustrated over that. Tokiko happily says that Setsuna is quite reliable. Towako thanks him and says that if they were to stay there, won’t they involve the Kanmitsuki family. Setsuna just smiles and says that it is alright. Towako asks him why. Yuuga remembers Setsuna telling him that he is the one who’ll protect his sister. Yuuga quickly pulls Towako to him and asks him if that is the car that is going to take them to the Kanmitsuki residence. While Towako tries to protest, Yuuga says that isn’t this very good, they should go see them [Kanmitsuki] first. Setsuna is surprised when Yuuga tells Towako, “Since that guy says that it is alright, then it is alright.” Towako blushes and asks what’s with that confidence. Yuuga tells her to shut up. This made Setsuna blush a bit then, he teases that Yuuga will be staying in the basement or the purple room. Yuuga angrily shouts if a person can live there. And so, they went to Kanmitsuki residence.

In the Kanmitsuki residence, Tokiko and Nobu bow and say that they will be under their care. The Kanmitsuki couple says that they were also under their care before. Inside, Towako says that it is beautiful, the place where Setsuna is born. Setsuna says that if she wants, she can always stay there. Towako thanks him but says that they still should get the main residence (from that man’s hands). Setsuna tells her that actually, she can give up on that family. “Compared to the family, I would want you to live a carefree life.” As Setsuna leaves after being called by his father, Towako wonders about what Setuna told her. She thinks that Setsuna said that they will take the residence back so she’ll depend on him. Later on, Mitsuya goes to see Towako and asks if she will be staying at his house. Towako comments that he is so cute, and yes, she is, so she’ll be under his care. Mitsuya asks until when she will be staying, and will they always be staying there. Towako says that she doesn’t know for sure yet but how about they play together. Mitsuya tells her that it would be better if she doesn’t trust his brother too much because he [Setsuna] had been in touch with Nigami Ritsuki. This surprises Towako that she exclaims what is going on. Mitsuya says that that he had seen them together, talking about some funds. “Brother has given the properties of Kanmitsuki family to that guy--” Utsugi enters and calls out Mitsuya’s name. This made Mitsuya quickly leave the room. Towako confronts Utsugi if it is a lie about Setsuna giving money to Ritsuki. Utsugi admits that it is true, and in exchange, for supplying funds to them, they are not going to lay a hand on the Kanmitsuki family. Towako says is that so, then it can’t be helped if it is to protect the Kanmitsuki family. Utsugi protests that it isn’t so, this is for her and the Gokurakuin family. “It is to provide everyone a shelter, a safe place.” Towako is shock that Setsuna did it for them. She asks out loud if Setsuna has been planning for them to be taken in by the Kanmitsuki family. Then, she stops upon remembering Setsuna telling her that he would want her to live a carefree life. Towako starts to tremble because more and more people around her are getting involved in this, and from today on, what other things can happen because she is a Gokurakuin. She remembers Kyousuke asking her about handing it over and giving up. Then, Towako has decided on something.
Later on, at night, Yuuga comments that he still can’t be at ease, staying at someone else’s house. Towako calls out his name and says that the thing about Rina, is something Kyousuke threaten her to do. Yuuga tells her to forget about that. Towako says that from then on, until now, they have now lost their house..and it must have been quite troublesome for him ever since they got married. “But, I.. I still want to be with you, Yuuga.. So..” Yuuga exclaims for her not to talk too much about that since they are already at this stage. “We will be together! *blushes* From now on, until forver!” Teary-eyed Towako is touched by what he said. She says, “Takatou.. Takatou Towako, what do you think of that? I’ll become Takatou Towako!” Yuuga looks surprised. [<- This means instead of Yuuga marrying into her family, she’ll marry into his family.] Narration: “Hey, Yuuga.. what I want to say is for us to be together forever. But, we are already at a point wherein that doesn’t need to be said.” The next day, Utsugi calls out to Setsuna and the others that Towako and Yuuga are nowhere to be found. He only found letters left behind. Setsuna sweatdrops upon seeing the table is filled with letters. He wonders out loud for how many people are those for. In the letter for Setsuna, she wrote, “I chose to do this thing. Sorry, Setsuna, and please take care of papa and mama. We are going to start a new life.” Somewhere else, Towako exclaims that this is a suitable rented apartment. Yuuga sweatdrops and asks really, they don’t have any furniture. Then, looking at a run down apartment, Towako exclaims that this will be their new home. Outside, the door is the name plate, ‘Takatou ♡’. Back at Kanmitsuki residence, Setsuna calmly reads the letter. Tokiko is freaking out that Towako left home even if she had been kidnapped, but then, strictly speaking this isn’t their house, so it isn’t like she is running away from home so what is she to do. Also holding a letter, Nobu couldn’t do anything about his wife’s hysterics. It seems that the parents have their own letters from Towako.
Utsugi apologizes to Setsuna and says that it is his fault for saying too much. Tokiko exclaims for Utsugi to quickly look for them since Tsubaki is also missing. Also holding a letter, Utsugi says yes, he’ll quickly look for them now. They were surprised when Setsuna says that there is no need to look for them. Tokiko asks Setsuna why. Setsuna explains that in his letter, Towako thinks that she is the reason for things had became like that, so she thought that it is better for her to leave them. Tokiko becomes tense and asks, how that can be. Setsuna says that of course, it isn’t Towako’s fault *smiles* but then, this is also good, as long as she can find happiness. Inside the run down apartment, Towako asks if they are really going to stay there. “Is this place where a person can stay!?” Aghast Yuuga quickly covers her mouth and tells her that other people staying there might hear her. “It can’t be helped! We are minors, without a guardian, we can only rent this run down place. That rental company is also very strange.” Towako says then, they go stay at a hotel. Yuuga calls her an idiot, they don’t have money to stay at a hotel so use her brain. Towako timidly relents and says that she’ll go take out her things from the luggage. Yuuga freaks out when he sees her taking out some dolls. He exclaims what the things she brought are. Towako says that they are Towako dolls, and doesn’t he need it with his bento box. [The dolls are put on top of the cloth wrapped bento box]. Yuuga exclaims who needs those. While Towako pouts if he doesn’t love her, Yuuga starts opening the other luggage and exclaims that she brought a lot but they are useless things. Yuuga sweatdrops at the side and wonders if it would really be okay for him to live together with this girl, he has to ‘hold on’. Towako happily says that she’ll go decorate the room. Narration: “We have left the Gokurakuin main residence. Of course, we won’t give it up but this is only for things not to get worse because Ritsu and Kyousuke-san are rushing towards ‘Gokurakuin Towako’. This way, mama and others won’t be put in any danger.. That’s right, so I shouldn’t be pessimistic. I will bravely face this current life[style].”
She calls out to Yuuga and happily exclaims for him to quickly look, the window curtains are bigger than the window. “How gorgeous! It’s like a castle!” Yuuga looks surprised then he smiles. He then asks where she got those curtains. Towako exclaims that she still has a lot of things. Yuuga wonders out loud if there is a fourth dimension in her luggage. Narration: “Leaving home is quite hard but I cannot just always sigh. Right now, this place, is my and Yuuga’s home.” After unpacking the things, Yuuga comments that it now looks like a house. Towako happily agrees. To Towako’s surprise, Yuuga prepares to go out by saying that he is going to work, and he thinks that he can still work at his old job. Yuuga explains that they don’t have money so they have to earn it, and they have to make the food themselves. “It can’t be just like before wherein we recklessly waste money.” Towako thinks that is right, money has to be earned. She exclaims, “I..I understand! I! I will also go to work!” Yuuga is speechless as he mutters, “You!? Really!?” Soon, Towako tries to look for work but she is refused either because she is a high school student or because it is strange that she is married. Then, she finds a florist who tells her that they are looking for a worker. As the florist tells her to follow him so that he can explain things to her, Towako notices a small boy looking at the flowers. She asks him what’s up. The boy says that it is his mother’s birthday but he doesn’t have money to buy her a gift. Pitying the boy, Towako takes a potted plant and gives it to the boy. As the boy happily thanks her and bid her goodbye, the angry florist fires Towako. Walking in the street, Towako feels tired. She thinks that it is quite hard to look for work, and the people who have work in this world are great. She wonders how Yuuga is doing. She reads his email that he is working at his former workplace and from today on, he might come home late. Watching inside the restaurant from a window, Towako pukes blood upon seeing how gorgeous Yuuga looks in his apron-waiter uniform as he serves some female customers with ice red tea and beef dish. While the female customers are raving about Yuuga, Towako thinks that it is bad for her heart to see him looking handsome like this, and she also wants to be his customer. She is furious at the female customers who has their eyes on Yuuga and thinks that Yuuga should definitely ‘hold on’. Then, Towako notices that before Yuuga is called again by the customer, he takes out his cellphone to see if there is a message from her.
Towako leaves the window and sits at a bench-type thing near the street. She gloomily wonders what she has been doing. Her husband has been striving hard, and she, who hasn’t found a job yet, is busy getting jealous. After looking flustered, Towako starts to flip through her ‘job opening’ Citywork magazine and tells herself to gambatte, this is for her to be able to be with Yuuga and she definitely must find a job. She thinks that it is no problem even if she is a high school student with no experience. Then, a plump guy approaches her and asks if she is looking for a job. After getting off work, Yuuga’s employer[/co-worker] asks him why he suddenly returned, and he felt that compared before, Yuuga is more enthusiastic with his work. “What had happened?” Yuuga smiles and says that he has to do his best. His employer says that he looks quite happy. Then, Yuuga gets an email from Towako who happily tells her that she got a job at a cafe. Upon arriving at the cafe, Yuuga freaks out to learn that it is a cosplay cat maid cafe. Towako and the other cat waitress exclaim, “Welcome home, master-♡ Please take your time~~ Nyan~~” Towako happily greets Yuuga and tells him to come in, she’ll show him his seat. Yuuga asks what..what is this. Towako happily exclaims that this is work, and everyone is quite intimate, and even the uniform is quite cute. Yuuga blushes over how cute Towako is in her cat uniform with her cleavage and her legs a bit exposed. Then, a nerdy guy calls out to her to come. Towako happily exclaims, “Yes, master!” <- store’s rules on how to answer. Yuuga is totally shock. The nerdy guy tells her that they play a jakenpon game and if he wins, Towako is going to strip her clothes off. Towako says okay, nyan. Yuuga is furious. Just when they are about to begin the game of jakenpon, Yuuga holds Towako’s hand and exclaims like a lion, “You’re going home!” Freaking out Towako timidly says yes. At a pedestrian overpass, Towako asks him why he is angry when she is properly working. Yuuga exclaims that of course he’ll be angry and why is she working in that kind of place. Towako protests that it is just a bit of special hobby cafe. Yuuga exclaims, a bit, only a bit, smiling hihi towards guys, and going nyan here & nyan there. Towako shouts that it isn’t smiling hihi, it is how a maid suppose to serve the customer. Flustered Yuuga answers back, “You cannot do such things with other guys! It is fine for you to just serve only me!”
He then goes into shock since blushing Towako and other passer-bys are looking at him. They wonder if it is some sort of performance. Sweatdropping Yuuga frantically tries to tell them that no, it isn’t like that. Towako happily says, “Yes, nyan~ master~” Yuuga tells her to shut up. Taking off his coat, blushing Yuuga puts it around her. Towako tells him that she doesn’t want him to be angry. “It is because you are very striving hard, so I also thought.. that you left home is also because of me, I won’t want to increase your burden..” Yuuga calls her stupid, for he is fundamentally penniless, and right now, he is just returning to his original state. “I also didn’t feel that you are a burden. *holds Towako’s waist* Let me say it, I can still provide for you. ..you.. only have to say the words, ‘welcome home’ when I return home, and that is enough.” They quietly look at each other. Then, embarrassed Yuuga looks away and tells her to say something. Towako smiles and says, “..thank you, I’m very happy.. *holds Yuuga’s hand* Let us go home! My husband-sama!” He asks her if she is treating her like a fool. She tells him that he is just serving him. He couldn’t answer back. She then asks if he doesn’t like this short skirt. Yuuga replies that no, and it is quite good..and if this is like this today, then tonight is.. Towako asks, huh, and he says that it is nothing. The door to their house is prettily decorated with a heart-shaped decor and the words, ‘Yuuga & Towako’. Narration: “But, Yuuga, please, if I only wait, then I would be very lonely. I would want us to say ‘I’m home’ together.” On the second day, to Yuuga’s shock, Towako happily says that she will be working in that place from today on, and she is Takatou Towako ♡ Someone wonders, Takatou?
Scans by 依蓮扫漫組.

Ookami-heika no Hanayome [Chapter 28]

2012-01-08T19:25:00.000+08:00

Originally posted @ tatsukida.pitas.com on January 2, 2012

Cover page: “For you, the thing I can do now is--” At Hakuyou kingdom, the flowers had started to bloom, and it is almost time for the Spring Banquet. Happily watching the others in the government affairs building, Yuulin thinks that everyone is now on the last stage of preparations. “Or how should I say this, the two people in charge would quarrel at one side, and work together at the other side. *Houen and Suigetsu’s mutual hate each other made them many times efficient at work* Even if that thing still makes me feel uneasy. *suspicious letter circulating and the mysterious official’s prediction* But if only, everyone work together for the common goal, the Spring Banquet will definitely be a success! I really anticipate for that day to come!” Narration: “—but it is quite regretful for the difficulty that is confronting me is not only these things.” At the harem, with a blank look, Yuulin points to herself and says, “I’m to stay behind and take care of things?” Jun tells her that the correct way to say it, is ‘basically, always stay behind at the harem’. “As a low ranking Queen consort, you would show yourself at the end of the banquet. And, it is already night by the time the banquet ends. During daytime, you will always be staying at the building where people congregate [/meeting place]. Our banquet will start in the morning. *Yuulin looks blank* But, from here, you can also appreciate the flowers. So please properly appreciate the beauty of the flowers, all by yourself.” Narration: “..how can this be.” At the harem, Reishou apologizes to Yuulin and says that he also asked them to let her stay longer at the banquet but it can’t be done. Chibi Jun says, ‘No!’. Sitting on the chair, Yuulin gloomily says, “Is that so--” She thinks that she will appreciate the flowers all by herself, all alone. Nervous Reishou quickly says, “But, honestly speaking, I don’t want you to attend this banquet. The people surrounding me are all scary old geezer. And, you’ll have to socialize with them the whole day, that I think it is quite tiring for you, Yuulin. You would have no way of watching the performance properly. You can’t even yawn. So, this time around, just be patient [and bear with this]. If you want to see the performance, you can wait for it to end, then I’ll call them at the outer [/entrance] palace, to perform for you.”

Yuulin tells him that it is okay, for this is the duty of a temporary bride. “It is truly regrettable that I wasn’t able to participate in the banquet, but, if it was able to make Your Majesty happy, then I feel that everyone’s goal has been achieved. *smiles; Reishou looks really flustered-guilty* Please, Your Majesty, you should definitely enjoy it, together with my share. Ah! You cannot bring out the Wolf King, else they would be frightened! Because this is a festival.” Reishou just looks nervous. Narration: “Ah ah.. But, I’m still a bit frustrated.. According to my anticipation, at the end of the banquet, I still want to be with everyone from the government affairs building, in busy excitement... *Yuulin watching everyone at work* That way, there will definitely a blossoming friendship between those two. *Imagination: Houen tells Suigetsu that he’s not bad at all. Suigetsu replies, you too.* I really want to see it with my own eyes...” Suddenly, Houen has a bad chill and he mentions this out loud. Suigetsu asks him if he wants to leave early. Houen angrily tells him that he’s the one who wanted that. Narration: “Even if I’m not around, they are all quite talented, so it is alright. The thing that I can do is only up to this point. What’s left is, showing myself at the end of the banquet, and I have to do my best in practicing the walk.” Yuulin looks gloomy after remembering Jun telling her that her level [of walking] is no good. At some other room, Dai says that Yuulin is really pitiful, when she obviously had been striving hard and in the end, she has been left aside. “How can that be? Is it because of that strange document?” Reishou tells him that is just a nonsense practical joke with no direction relation to this but, according to Jun, the Queen consort possesses ‘political influence’ and it is good to avoid arousing suspicion. Dai laughs and says that Yuulin is really pitiful since that is the reason why she has been kept far away from the official activity, and she wasn’t even reward [for her efforts]. Reishou says that it is really pitiful but this is not some place where everyone had the mood of friendly relations, and that is a fact. “The rough idea of the banquet that she imagined, suits her more.” Dai just goes =3 and thinks ‘ho ho’. Narration: “--and things progressed smoothly, as time passes by.. The Spring Banquet, starts.” At the Hakui Garden’s En Pavilion, Yuulin blushes over Reishou’s gorgeous outfit. Touching her chin, Reishou tells her that he will be going ahead for the banquet. “I’ll wait for you and we’ll admire the flowers together.” Somewhat sad, Yuulin says, “—yes, Your Majesty.” She thinks that it can’t be helped for this is her duty. “—actually, I think that even if it is only a little while, I also want to admire the flowers with you..”
Later on, Yuulin is surprised that she is wearing a servant’s outfit with glasses. Sweatdropping, Yuulin asks what this is about. While Gen is sighing, Dai happily asks what she is saying, what that is, of course, it is to disguise her as a lowly attendant. “It’s so fun-- Like that, you can look and walk around. *Yuulin exclaims, ha* It’s alright, it’s alright, I’ve already got Li Jun’s consent. *Chibi Jun tells Dai that they should quickly come back, and he already prepared the clothes and paperwork[/credentials]* The scale of the banquet is huge, there are so many people, and they will also be drinking, so you won’t be exposed, don’t worry-- *flustered Yuulin tries to protest* Didn’t you also want to attend that banquet? Don’t be too conscientious. By the way, you’ll always be idle until nightfall so it’s alright for you to walk around outside. Didn’t you want to see it? The Spring Banquet.” Outside, the flowers are in full bloom with Chinese lanterns hanging on the trees. There are musicians near the river where the officials sit and drink on a laid out carpet. Yuulin and Dai are carrying drinks in a tray. Looking around, blushing Yuulin says that it is so beautiful, and the courtyard has transformed to a gathering place. The officials are grouped together by status and deployment. Dai tells her that it is more gorgeous at the place where the higher officials are. “If we go here, we can secretly see it. Don’t you want to see His Majesty?” Yuulin thinks that she does want to see it but.. Yuulin asks Dai that didn’t they get Reishou’s permission. Dai tells her that Reishou is simply over protective with her [Queen Consort], and because he specially treasures her, she doesn’t know anything [that is going on]. Yuulin thinks that ‘my work is up to here’, she felt that she is being restricted up to that point. At a cliff overlooking the place, Dai says that Reishou said that he thinks that this kind of place doesn’t have any benefit for her, so he doesn’t want her to see something. “I’ve used a small trick so that you can survey the scene from this elevated position. I really love to meddle in other people’s business.” Yuulin wonders, “What is it that His Majesty doesn’t want me to see?” While looking out to where Reishou is, Dai thinks that anyway, this time around, even if it is a ‘Banquet’ in name, he’s afraid that those old geezers are locked in constant strife at His Majesty’s side. Dai exclaims, that he sees it. Dai thiks that he also understands the reason why Reishou doesn’t want Yuulin to see that kind of thing.. Then,Dai and Yuulin look surprised. At the center, Reishou is being served wine by beautiful ladies. Yuulin freaks out and shouts, “What-!? *trembles* What is that?” Dai looks nervous and mutters, what. Trembling Yuulin says, “Making the Consort stay at the palace and he, himself is doing..?” Dai says, “That’s right! What is going on- How baffling- (Your Majesty, no way!)” Yuulin gloomily mutters, “Is that what His Majesty doesn’t want to let me see? Ah, ha..so that’s it.” Really nervous and aghast Dai thinks, “I.. might be beheaded by His Majesty, because of this.. Bad timing..”
Below, Houen furiously calls out to Suigetsu and exclaims what is going on. “There’s a lot of those disgusting ladies at His Majesty’s side!” Suigetsu tells him that there is nothing strange with dancing ladies pouring wine for His Majesty, and how could he say that is disgusting. Houen angrily shouts that this is a solemn gathering and the heck he is doing. Suigetsu tells him that it is a banquet. “—but honestly, it is a bit strange. I don’t remember having this kind of arrangement. There’s really no taste [/style]. Ah ah, I really hate it.. His Majesty is really scary, quite scary than he usually is, I really want to go home.. I don’t want to go to work tomorrow..” Houen angrily shouts for him to quit talking nonsense and quickly handle this for that area is under his supervision. A couple of guys are quietly looking at them. Somewhere else, Dai apologizes to Yuulin for he didn’t thought that [is what she’ll see]. Yuulin sadly says that it is alright, she can really understand this. Dai replies, “No, even if you understand, I’m also at a pinch.. You stay there for a while, and I’ll go get you something to drink.” Gloomy Yuulin thinks, “So that’s how it is-- The Wolf King in the banquet is like that.. Making the temporary bride stay and take care of things at the palace, hmph- and even saying happily having fun-- Who would have thought! *agitated* What’s the meaning of that! Even appearing like he isn’t interested at all about the banquet! *Chibi Reishou tensely tells her that he doesn’t want her to attend it* Simply, treated me like a fool-- Speaking of that, I don’t have the right to be angry! *looks up and sees the mysterious official* --huh? Just now.. Is that the guy with an ominous prediction..? *starts to follow him* After knowing that prediction, I had been in a complete mess. He is under whom? I also don’t know.. But, if I don’t quickly return, Kou Dai will be worried. *place where there are a lot of carriages and containers* I’m at a place where they left the things. *looks around* This is bad! I’m lost.” Suddenly someone grabs her hand and pulls her to the side. With her mouth being covered, Yuulin looks up to see that it is Reishou who asks, “Do you exist just to give me a fright?” Yuulin blushes and asks him why he is there, what about the banquet. Reishou tells her that there is a program intermission [while Houen and Suigetsu are discussing/fixing things]. “Why are you here? Is this Kou Dai’s idea? *Chibi Dai looks nervous.* --you’ve dressed up quite cute..” Yuulin blushes and thinks what he is saying, when just now, he is surrounded by beautiful ladies. Trying to free herself from Reishou’s grasp, Yuulin thanks him for noticing that. “Please let me go, I’m going back.” To her shock, Reishou pulls her to him and asks why she is angry. Yuulin thinks, what’s up with this guy. Reishou tells her that even if he knows that it isn’t quite good to leave her at the palace but..
Yuulin exclaims, “No! I’m not angry! Please let me go! *teary-eyed* I.. If I’m at your side, you can’t be happy! (let me go~~) Later on, I’ll just be good and stay at the palace, so you can relax!” Puzzled Reishou asks her how can he be happy without her by his side. Yuulin thinks that he is lying, when he is obviously a womanizer. Reishou is puzzled when Yuulin struggles to free herself and exclaims for him not to say such things anymore, and she knows that he also have a lot of difficulties. Reishou holds her face to him and says, “If you don’t tell me why you are this angry, then I’ll always keep on asking. For me, this is more important than attending the banquet.” Yuulin blushes and thinks, this person.. She says, “—Wolf Majesty, you are such a—pervert[/lecher]..! *Reishou asks, what?* You’ve said those lines to many women, right..! *Reishou says, huh* --but, unluckily for you! Even if I’m aiming to become a professional Queen Consort! I won’t be deceived by your words! Let me tell you, I totally don’t take offense by it! Or perhaps, I should say I really thoroughly understand it! ~~Okay! Quickly go back! The beautiful ladies are waiting for you! I’ll just wait at the palace, and Your Majesty can just go and freely enjoy without a care! Wolf Majesty, you scoundrel! *Sweatdropping Reishou says, about that, Yuulin* Ah! *backs away* Anyway, I’m just a ‘sad reminder’ woman--! *runs off* I’m really fed up--” Reishou is midway on calling her back but he says, “—Kou Dai.” Trembling while suppressing his laughter, Dai says here, he’s here half-way ago, and he will chase after Yuulin. Reishou says that it seems that Yuulin is misunderstanding something and he [Dai] should first calm her down for talking with her right now will all just be in vain. “In addition, I’ll keep this matter in mind.” Thinking that Yuulin is strange, Dai says ye..yes. Somewhere else at the banquet, Keitaku comments that it is a boring banquet. Someone asks is that so, when everyone has been praising His Majesty[/it] to high heavens unceasingly. Keitaku says that if he said that it is boring, it is boring. The others bow and say yes, it is as he said. Keitaku scoffs off this Ryu-Han cooperation, and it is all because of that ‘whereabouts unknown’ silly woman which is making him feel gloomy. “Is the banquet progressing in accordance to what we anticipated?” Someone says, yes, and it has already been confirmed with the spy within the government affairs building. “The Queen Consort’s visit ceremony will be at the end of the banquet..” Keitaku smiles and says, “That stupid and shallow person, appearing as one wishes. This way, it’s almost time for you to know your own place. *scene of suspicious document* That..unlucky Queen Consort who incurs disaster. *scene of mysterious official*” Somewhere else, Yuulin exclaims, “What are you saying!? I’m not misunderstanding anything, nor am I shaken [by it]. I understand everything!” Dai says, “Ya, ya-- but first, Your Highness, you should calm down, no matter how I said it, this has something to do with my life. Do you know that meaningful glare in His Majesty’s eyes is fairly serious.”
Scans by 17kkmh.com and ベーリ猫.